2018 NissanConnect Owner's Manual | Nissan USA (Altima, Maxima, And Murano) Connect Navigation

User Manual: Pdf 2018 Nissan Murano Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 259 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2018 NissanConnect Owner's Manual (Altima, Maxima, and Murano)
N18E NCGNJU1
Table of Contents

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2018 NISSANCONNECT®NCGNJ-N

NCGNJ-N

Printing : June 2018

Publication No.:

Printed in the U.S.A.

N18E NCGNJU1

2018 NISSANCONNECT®

OWNER’S MANUAL

MAXIMA MURANO

ALTIMA

Foreword

Prologue

NCGNJN1402-120906-251BEBC1-23DC-4665-B405-18A0830C57B1

NISSAN CONSUMER AFFAIRS DE-

PARTMENT

NCGNJN1402-120906-0A572194-58C0-4CCD-A796-B7907E2D317D

For assistance or inquiries about the

NISSAN Navigation System, NISSAN war-

ranty, service or general questions, con-

tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs

Department at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

1-800-387-0122

NISSAN NAVIGATION SYSTEM

HELPDESK CONTACT INFORMA-

TION

NCGNJN1402-120906-7E109BAF-7F49-429A-8CC5-3267D2E74C0F

To order updated map data, contact the

NISSAN NAVIGATION SYSTEM HELPDESK

at:

.E-MAIL: nissan-navi-info@here.com

.WEBSITE: www.NissanNavigation.com

.PHONE: 1-888-661-9995

NISSANCONNECT

SERVICES

HELPDESK CONTACT INFORMA-

TION GUID-25DEBBE3-2812-46C0-9B00-52166087D9D9

For assistance or inquiries about the

NissanConnect

Services, contact Nis-

sanConnect

Services helpdesk at:

.E-MAIL: nissanownerservices@nissan-

usa.com

.WEBSITE: https://www.nissanusa.

com/connect/support

.PHONE: 1-855-426-6628

FOREWORD

Thank you for purchasing a NISSAN vehi-

cle.

This user’s manual is for NissanConnect

with Navigation and Services offered in

your NISSAN vehicle.

Operation instructions for the following

systems are included in this manual.

.Audio

.Hands-Free Phone

.NissanConnect

Services

.Navigation

.Voice recognition

.Information and settings viewable on

NissanConnect

Please read this manual carefully to en-

sure safe operation of NissanConnect

with Navigation and Services.

.Because of possible specification

changes and optional equipment,

some sections of this manual may

not apply to your vehicle.

.All information, specifications and il-

lustrations in this manual are those in

effect at the time of printing. NISSAN

reserves the right to change specifica-

tions or design at any time without

notice.

.Do not remove this manual from the

vehicle when selling this vehicle. The

next user of the system may need the

manual.

Table of Contents

1Introduction

How to use this manual.... 1-2

Safety information................ 1-3

Trademarks................................ 1-4

Regulatory information .... 1-5

Licenses......................................... 1-7

2Getting started

Control buttons and

touch screen display .......... 2-2

Starting system.................... 2-14

Basic operation.................... 2-14

System settings................... 2-23

3Audio system

Audio operation

precautions ................................ 3-2

Names and functions

of audio control

buttons ....................................... 3-10

Audio operations ................ 3-14

Audio settings....................... 3-37

CD/USB memory device

care and cleaning .............. 3-38

4Hands-Free Phone

Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone

System ........................................... 4-2

5Information

Information menu................. 5-2

NissanConnect

Services (if so

equipped)..................................... 5-7

SiriusXM Travel Link

(for U.S. and Canada)....... 5-18

Apple CarPlay ....................... 5-20

Android Auto.......................... 5-23

6Navigation

Safety information................ 6-3

Map operation ......................... 6-3

Setting destination............ 6-14

Route guidance.................... 6-28

Viewing traffic

information (for U.S. and

Canada)...................................... 6-47

Storing a

location/route....................... 6-50

Navigation settings........... 6-58

General information for

navigation system ............. 6-61

7Voice recognition

Voice recognition .................. 7-2

8Troubleshooting guide

Customer assistance.......... 8-2

System unit ................................ 8-3

Audio system............................ 8-5

Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone

System ........................................ 8-14

NissanConnect

Services (if so

equipped).................................. 8-17

Apple CarPlay ........................ 8-18

Android Auto.......................... 8-19

Navigation ................................ 8-21

Voice recognition ............... 8-29

1 Introduction

How to use this manual .......................................................... 1-2

For safe operation ................................................................. 1-2

Reference symbols................................................................ 1-2

Screen illustrations ............................................................... 1-2

Safety information ....................................................................... 1-3

Trademarks ....................................................................................... 1-4

Regulatory information ........................................................... 1-5

Laser product ......................................................................... 1-5

Bluetooth® devices ............................................................. 1-5

Licenses ............................................................................................... 1-7

Telematic Control Unit Gen2K (if

so equipped) ............................................................................ 1-7

1. Introduction

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This manual uses special words, symbols,

icons and illustrations organized by func-

tion.

Please refer to the following items and

familiarize yourself with them.

FOR SAFE OPERATION

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence

of a hazard that could cause death or

serious personal injury. To avoid or

reduce the risk, the procedures must

be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence

of a hazard that could cause minor or

moderate personal injury or damage

to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the

risk, the procedures must be followed

carefully.

NOTE:

Indicates items that help you under-

stand and maximize the performance of

your vehicle. If ignored, they may lead to

a malfunction or poor performance.

REFERENCE SYMBOLS

INFO:

This indicates information that is neces-

sary for efficient use of your vehicle or

accessories.

Reference page:

This indicates the title and page that you

should refer to.

<>:

Indicates a button on the control panel.

[]:

This indicates a key/item displayed on the

screen.

Voice Command:

This indicates an operation by voice

command.

SCREEN ILLUSTRATIONS

.The illustrations in this manual are

representatives of various models

and may not be identical with the

design and specifications of your ve-

hicle.

.Icons and menu items displayed on

the screen may be abbreviated or

omitted from the screen illustrations

when appropriate. The omitted icons

and menu items are described as

dotted lines as illustrated.

1-2

SAFETY INFORMATION

This system is primarily designed to help

you support pleasant driving as outlined

in this manual. However, you, the driver,

must use the system safely and properly.

Information and the availability of services

may not always be up to date. The system

is not a substitute for safe, proper and

legal driving.

Before using the system, please read the

following safety information. Always use

the system as outlined in this manual.

WARNING

.To operate the system, first park

the vehicle in a safe location and

set the parking brake. Operating

the system while driving can dis-

tract the driver and may result in a

serious accident.

.Exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation. If the

system doesn’t respond immedi-

ately, please be patient and keep

your eyes on the road. Inattentive

driving may lead to a crash result-

ing in serious injuries or death.

.Do not rely on route guidance

alone. Always be sure that all

driving maneuvers are legal and

safe in order to avoid accidents.

.Do not disassemble or modify this

system. If you do, it may result in

accidents, fire or electrical shock.

.If you notice any foreign objects in

the system hardware, spill liquid

on the system or notice smoke or a

smell coming from it, stop using

the system immediately and it is

recommended you contact a

NISSAN dealer. Ignoring such con-

ditions may lead to accidents, fire

or electrical shock.

CAUTION

.Some jurisdictions may have laws

limiting the use of video screens

while driving. Use this system only

where it is legal to do so.

.Extreme temperature conditions

[below −4°F (−20°C) and above

158°F (70°C)] could affect the per-

formance of the system.

.The display screen may break if it

is hit with a hard or sharp object. If

the display screen breaks, do not

touch it. Doing so could result in an

injury.

NOTE:

Do not keep the system running with

the engine or the hybrid system

stopped. Doing so may discharge the

vehicle battery (12V battery). When you

use the system, always keep the engine

or the hybrid system running.

1. Introduction

1-3

1. Introduction

TRADEMARKS

Windows® and Windows Media® are regis-

tered trademarks or trademarks of Micro-

soft Corporation in the United States of

America and/or other countries.

Windows Media Player:

This product is protected by certain

intellectual property right of Microsoft.

Use or distribution of such technology

outside of this product is prohibited with-

out a license from Microsoft.

“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone”

mean that an electronic accessory has

been designed to connect specifically to

iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been

certified by the developer to meet Apple

performance standards. Apple is not re-

sponsible for the operation of this device

or its compliance with safety and regula-

tory standards. Please note that the use of

this accessory with iPod or iPhone may

affect wireless performance.

Apple, the Apple logo, iPhone, iPod, iPod

classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are

trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the

U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a

trademark of Apple Inc. App Store is a

service mark of Apple Inc.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are

registered trademarks owned by Blue-

tooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks

by Clarion Co., Ltd. is under license. Other

trademarks and trade names are those of

their respective owners.

HD Radio Technology manufactured un-

der license from iBiquity Digital Corpora-

tion. U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents

see http://patents.dts.com/. HD Radio

and the HD, HD Radio, and “ARC” logos

are registered trademarks or trademarks

of iBiquity Digital Corporation in the Uni-

ted States and/or other countries.

SiriusXM® services require a subscription

after trial period and are sold separately

or as a package. The satellite service is

available only in the 48 contiguous USA

and DC. SiriusXM satellite service is also

available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio and SiriusXM Traf-

fic subscriptions are sold separately or as

a package, and are continuous until you

call SiriusXM to cancel. See SiriusXM Cus-

tomer Agreement for complete terms at

www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM Travel Link is

available in select markets. For more

information, call Listener Care at 1-877-

447-0011 or visit siriusxm.com/traffic.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio and SiriusXM Tra-

vel Link subscriptions are sold separately

or as a package, and are continuous until

you call SiriusXM to cancel. See SiriusXM

Customer Agreement for complete terms

at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM Travel Link

is available in select markets. For more

information, call Listener Care at 1-877-

447-0011 or visit siriusxm.com/travellink.

1-4

App Store

Apple and the Apple logo are trademarks

of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and

other countries. App Store is a service

mark of Apple Inc.

Siri

Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered

in the U.S. and other countries.

Apple CarPlay

Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Google Play

Google, Google Play are trademarks of

Google Inc.

Google

Google is a trademark of Google Inc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

LASER PRODUCT

This NissanConnect

with Navigation

and Services (if so equipped) is certified

as a Class 1 laser product.

For U.S. and Canada:

The system complies with DHHS Rules 21

CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J.

WARNING

.Do not disassemble or modify this

system. There are no user service-

able parts in the system.

.If maintenance, adjustments and

operations other than those spe-

cified in this manual are at-

tempted, injury due to laser

radiation and exposure could oc-

cur.

BLUETOOTH® DEVICES

FCC Regulatory information (for

U.S.)

FCC ID: WY2QY8050

NOTE

This device compiles with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Ex-

posure

This equipment complies with FCC radia-

tion exposure limits set forth for uncon-

trolled environment and meets the FCC

radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines

in Supplement C to OET65. This equip-

ment has very low levels of RF energy that

it deemed to comply without maximum

permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But

it is desirable that it should be installed

and operated with at least 20 cm and

1. Introduction

1-5

1. Introduction

more between the radiator and person’s

body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists,

feet and ankles).

Co-location: This transmitter must not be

co-located or operated in conjunction

with any other antenna or transmitter.

IC Regulatory information (for

Canada)

The antenna cannot be removed (and

changed) by user.

This device complies with Industry Cana-

da license-exempt RSS standard(s). Op-

eration is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Ex-

posure

This equipment complies with IC radiation

exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled

environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC

radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This

equipment has very low levels of RF

energy that it deemed to comply without

maximum permissive exposure evalua-

tion (MPE). But it is desirable that it should

be installed and operated with at least 20

cm and more between the radiator and

person’s body (excluding extremities:

hands, wrists, feet and ankles.)

Co-location: This transmitter must not be

co-located or operated in conjunction

with any other antenna or transmitter.

This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian Interfer-

ence-Causing Equipment Regulations.

For Quebec :

L’antenne ne peut être enlevée (et mod-

ifié) par l’utilisateur.

NOTE

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appa-

reils radio exempts de licence. L’exploita-

tion est autorisée aux deux conditions

suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas pro-

duire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de

l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage

radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage

est susceptible d’en compromettre le

fonctionnement.

ATTENTION : l`exposition aux rayonne-

ments radiofréquence

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

d’exposition aux radiations IC définies

pour un environnement non contrôlé et

satisfait RSS-102 de la fréquence radio (RF)

IC règles d`exposition. Cet équipement

présente des niveaux très faibles d’énergie

RF réputé conforme sans évaluation de

l`exposition maximale permissive (MPE).

Mais il est souhaitable qu’il devrait être

installé et fonctionner avec au moins 20

cm entre le radiateur et le corps de la

personne (à l`exception des membres:.

Mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).

Co-localisation : Cet émetteur ne doit pas

être co-implantés ou exploités en con-

jonction avec une autre antenne ou un

autre émetteur.

Regulatory information (for Mex-

ico)

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a

las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es

posible que este equipo o dispositivo no

cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este

equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-

quier interferencia, incluyendo la que

pueda causar su operación no deseada.

1-6

LICENSES

TELEMATIC CONTROL UNIT

GEN2K (if so equipped)

A. INTRODUCTION

This product Telematic Control Unit

Gen2K incorporates the following soft-

ware:

(1) the software developed by, or devel-

oped for, Ficosa International, S.A. (“Fico-

sa”),

(2) the software owned by third party and

licensed to Ficosa,

(3) the software licensed under the GNU

GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE, Version 2

(“GPL”),

(4) the software licensed under the GNU

LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE, Ver-

sion 2.0 or the GNU LESSER GENERAL

PUBLIC LICENSE, Version 2.1 (collectively

“LGPL”), the Mozilla Public license v2

(“MPL”), the GPL-2.0 license with-

OpenSSL-exception (“GPLOpenSSL”) and

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE, Version 3

with GCC exception (together with the

GPL software, jointly “Copyleft Software”),

and/or

(5) open sourced software licensed under

terms and conditions other than Copyleft

Software.

For the software classified as (3) or (4)

above, a copy of the license text is

included with the source code in the URL

indicated below, and please also refer to

the terms and conditions of Copyleft

Software licenses at the websites listed

below:

GPL: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-

licenses/gpl-2.0.html and https://www.

gnu.org/licenses/gpl-3.0.en.html

LGPL: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-

licenses/lgpl-2.1.html and http://www.

gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.0.

html

MPL: https://www.mozilla.org/en-US/

MPL/2.0/

GPL-2.0-with-OpenSSL-exception:

https://gitlab.com/cryptsetup/cryptset-

up/blob/master/COPYING

GPLv3 GCC Exception: https://www.gnu.

org/licenses/gcc-exception-3.1.en.html

The software classified as (3) and (4)

above are copyrighted by multiple people.

Please refer to the websites below regard-

ing the copyright notices of those people.

https://www.ficosa.com/software/

opensource/

The software licensed under the licenses

indicated in (3) and (4) above (“Copyleft

Software”) is distributed in the hope that it

will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WAR-

RANTY, without even the implied warranty

of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

For at least three (3) years from delivery of

a device embedding the above product,

Ficosa will give to any third party who

contacts us at the Contact Information

provided below, for a charge no more

than our cost of physically performing

source code distribution, a complete ma-

chine-readable copy of the source code

corresponding to the Copyleft Software

indicated above. When requesting this

source code, please specify Product: Tele-

matic Control Unit Gen2K and version Cx9.

Furthermore, source code and licenses

corresponding to the Copyleft Software

listed above is freely available to you and

any member of the public at the website

listed below:

https://www.ficosa.com/software/

opensource/

1. Introduction

1-7

1. Introduction

[Contact Information]

For enquiries about open source software

at FICOSA, please contact Ficosa’s Com-

pliance Officer by email: FOSS@ficosa.com

Please note that we are unable to answer

any queries regarding source code details,

etc.

In addition, it is necessary for end users to

provide their own internet connection.

The end user is responsible for any con-

nection or line charges incurred through

browsing websites or downloading.

B. LICENSING ANC COPYRIGHT NOTICE

INFORMATION

The software classified as (5) above con-

tains various open sourced software

(“OSS”) listed in the below website. Please

see the website indicted next for the

terms and conditions of the licenses

(OSS Licenses) and other information

regarding the OSS contained this Product:

https://www.ficosa.com/software/

opensource/

1-8

2 Getting started
Control buttons and touch screen display .............. 2-2
Control panel (for U.S. and Canada) ........................ 2-2
Control panel (for Mexico) ............................................... 2-4
Liquid crystal display ........................................................... 2-6
Steering wheel controls (for U.S.
and Canada)............................................................................... 2-7
Steering wheel controls (for Mexico) ................... 2-10
Display Commander (if so equipped) .................. 2-11
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port
and AUX (auxiliary) input jack .................................... 2-12
Starting system ........................................................................... 2-14
Start-up screen ..................................................................... 2-14
Basic operation ........................................................................... 2-14
Selecting menu from Launch Bar .......................... 2-14
Touch panel operation ................................................ 2-16
Main screen operations ............................................... 2-16
Adjusting settings ............................................................ 2-18
How to input letters and numbers ..................... 2-18
How to view and operate HOME
MENU screen ........................................................................ 2-19
Functions disabled while driving .......................... 2-22
System settings.......................................................................... 2-23
Settings menu ..................................................................... 2-23
Display settings .................................................................. 2-24
Volume and Beeps settings ..................................... 2-24
Clock settings ...................................................................... 2-25
Language and unit settings ..................................... 2-25
Connecting Bluetooth® device .............................. 2-26

2. Getting started

CONTROL BUTTONS AND

TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY

CONTROL PANEL (for U.S. and Canada)

Type A (if so equipped)

Type B (if so equipped)

2-2

Type C (if so equipped)

<MAP>:

Push to display the current location

map. During route guidance with a

map screen displayed, push this but-

ton to show/hide the split screen.

“Map operation” (page 6-3)

<MENU>:

Push to display the HOME MENU

screen.

“How to view and operate HOME

MENU screen” (page 2-19)

< >:

Push to switch between the day

screen (bright) and the night screen

(dark) and to adjust the level of screen

brightness. Push and hold the button

to turn off the display. Push the

button again to turn on the display.

“Display settings” (page 2-24)

< >:

Push to eject a CD.

“Compact Disc (CD) player”

(page 3-21)

CD slot:

Insert a CD into the slot.

“Compact Disc (CD) player”

(page 3-21)

Touch screen display:

Various information and operation

menus are displayed on the liquid

crystal display. Touch keys and icons

on the screen for operation.

“Touch panel operation”

(page 2-16)

Map data card slot:

The slot is for the map data SD card

provided with your vehicle. To eject

the SD card, open the lid and push the

SD card in and then release.

“Map data” (page 6-67)

< >/< >:

In audio operation, selecting and fast-

forwarding/rewinding tracks as well

as radio station/channel scanning

can be performed.

“3. Audio system”

<AUDIO>:

Push to display the audio screen.

When this button is pushed while the

audio screen is displayed, a screen to

select an audio source will be dis-

played.

“Selecting audio source”

(page 3-14)

<VOL/ >/<VOLUME/ >:

Push to turn the power of the audio

system on and off. Turn to adjust the

volume.

<TUNE·SCROLL/SOUND>:

When a menu screen is displayed, turn

the dial to select items on the screen.

Push to confirm the selected item or

setting.

2. Getting started

2-3

2. Getting started

The button can also be used for audio

operations.

“Audio main buttons (for U.S. and

Canada)” (page 3-10)

<BACK>:

Depending on the screen, pushing the

button will display the previous

screen.

For character input operation, push or

push and hold to delete the charac-

ters entered.

Push and hold to quit the voice

recognition session.

“7. Voice recognition”

CONTROL PANEL (for Mexico)

Type A (if so equipped)

Type B (if so equipped)

<MAP>:

Push to display the current location

map. During route guidance with a

map screen displayed, push this but-

ton to show/hide the split screen.

“Map operation” (page 6-3)

<MENU>:

Push to display the HOME MENU

2-4

screen.

“How to view and operate HOME

MENU screen” (page 2-19)

< >:

Push to switch between the day

screen (bright) and the night screen

(dark) and to adjust the level of screen

brightness. Push and hold the button

to turn off the display. Push the

button again to turn on the display.

“Display settings” (page 2-24)

< >:

Push to eject a CD.

“Compact Disc (CD) player”

(page 3-21)

CD slot:

Insert a CD into the slot.

“Compact Disc (CD) player”

(page 3-21)

Touch screen display:

Various information and operation

menus are displayed on the liquid

crystal display. Touch keys and icons

on the screen for operation.

“Touch panel operation”

(page 2-16)

Map data card slot:

The slot is for the map data SD card

provided with your vehicle. To eject

the SD card, open the lid and push the

SD card in and then release.

“Map data” (page 6-67)

< >/< >:

In audio operation, selecting and fast-

forwarding/rewinding tracks as well

as radio station scanning can be

performed.

“3. Audio system”

<AUDIO>:

Push to display the audio screen.

When this button is pushed while the

audio screen is displayed, a screen to

select an audio source will be dis-

played.

“Selecting audio source”

(page 3-14)

<VOLUME/ >:

Push to turn the power of the audio

system on and off. Turn to adjust the

volume.

< /SOUND>:

Turn to highlight an item on the

screen, and push to select the high-

lighted item.

On the map screen, turn to adjust the

map scale.

The button can also be used for audio

operations.

“Audio main buttons (for Mexico)”

(page 3-12)

<BACK>:

Depending on the screen, pushing the

button will display the previous

screen.

For character input operation, push or

push and hold to delete the charac-

ters entered.

Push and hold to quit the voice

recognition session.

“7. Voice recognition”

CAUTION

.Never insert foreign objects such

as coins into the SD card slot.

Doing so may result in a malfunc-

tion of the device.

.Do not apply too much pressure

when inserting the SD card into the

slot. Doing so may result in a

malfunction of the device.

.The SD card may be hot when it is

removed from the device. This

does not indicate a malfunction.

2. Getting started

2-5

2. Getting started

NOTE:

Do not remove the SD card containing

map data. If the SD card containing map

data is accidentally removed, reinsert

the SD card containing map data into

the slot and place the ignition switch in

the OFF position.

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY

The display is a liquid crystal display and

should be handled with care.

WARNING

Never disassemble the display. Some

parts utilize extremely high voltage.

Touching them may result in serious

personal injury.

Characteristics of liquid crystal

display

.If the temperature inside the vehicle is

especially low, the display will stay

relatively dim or the movement of the

images may be slow. These conditions

are normal. The display will function

normally when the interior of the

vehicle has warmed up.

.Some pixels in the display are darker or

brighter than others. This condition is

an inherent characteristic of liquid

crystal displays, and it is not a mal-

function.

.A remnant of the previous display

image may remain on the screen. This

screen burn is inherent in displays, and

it is not a malfunction.

.The screen may become distorted by

strong magnetic fields.

Maintenance of display

CAUTION

.To clean the display screen, use a

dry, soft cloth. If additional clean-

ing is necessary, use a small

amount of neutral detergent with

a soft cloth.

.Clean the display with the ignition

switch in the OFF position. If the

display is cleaned while the igni-

tion switch is placed in the ON

position, unintentional operation

may occur.

.To clean the display, never use a

rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thin-

ner or any kind of solvent or paper

towel with a chemical cleaning

agent. They will scratch or deterio-

rate the panel.

.Do not splash any liquid such as

water or car fragrance on the dis-

play. Contact with liquid will cause

the system to malfunction.

To clean the display screen, use a dry, soft

cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary,

use a small amount of neutral detergent

with a soft cloth. Never spray the screen

with water or detergent. Dampen the

cloth first, then wipe the screen.

2-6

STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (for

U.S. and Canada)

INFO:

Steering wheel switches are mainly for the

vehicle information display control and

may not be able to operate the touch

screen display depending on the condi-

tions. Follow the pop-up guide messages

and labels shown on the vehicle informa-

tion display.

Some of the information displayed on the

vehicle information display are linked with

the touch screen display.

For other details of the vehicle informa-

tion display, refer to the vehicle Owner’s

Manual.

Steering wheel switches (Type A)

(if so equipped)

< > (TALK) :

Push this button to use the voice

recognition system. Push and hold to

end the voice recognition session.

“Giving voice commands”

(page 7-2)

When Apple CarPlay is active, pushing

and holding this button will start a Siri

voice control session.

“Siri operation” (page 5-21)

When Android Auto is active, pushing

and holding this button will start an

Android Auto voice control session.

“Operating with voice”

(page 5-25)

< >/< >,<OK>:

During voice recognition operation,

tilt up/down to highlight different

items, and push to select the high-

lighted item.

Audio operations are also possible by

tilting the switch up and down.

“Steering wheel mounted audio

control buttons (for U.S. and

Canada)” (page 3-13)

< > :

Push to display the hands-free phone

operation screen.

When you receive a phone call, push

this button to answer the call.

“4. Hands-Free Phone”

< >/< >:

The buttons are used mainly for the

vehicle information display operation.

Refer to the vehicle Owner’s Manual

for details.

During voice recognition operation,

<>can be used to return to the

previous screen.

<SOURCE>:

Push to change the audio source to

the available mode.

“Selecting audio source”

(page 3-14)

2. Getting started

2-7

2. Getting started

< >:

Push + or - to adjust the volume.

Steering wheel switches (Type B)

(if so equipped)

< >/< >,<OK>:

During voice recognition operation,

tilt up/down to highlight different

items, and push to select the high-

lighted item.

Audio operations are also possible by

tilting the switch up and down.

“Steering wheel mounted audio

control buttons (for U.S. and

Canada)” (page 3-13)

<SOURCE>:

Push to change the audio source to

the available mode.

“Selecting audio source”

(page 3-14)

< >:

Push + or - to adjust the volume.

< >/< >:

The buttons are used mainly for the

vehicle information display operation.

Refer to the vehicle Owner’s Manual

for details.

During voice recognition operation,

<>can be used to return to the

previous screen.

< > (TALK):

Push this button to use the voice

recognition system. Push and hold to

end the voice recognition session.

“Giving voice commands”

(page 7-2)

When Apple CarPlay is active, pushing

and holding this button will start a Siri

voice control session.

“Siri operation” (page 5-21)

When Android Auto is active, pushing

and holding this button will start an

Android Auto voice control session.

“Operating with voice”

(page 5-25)

< >:

Push to display the hands-free phone

operation screen.

2-8

When you receive a phone call, push

this button to answer the call.

“4. Hands-Free Phone”

Steering wheel switches (Type C)

(if so equipped)

<SOURCE>:

Push to change the audio source to

the available mode.

“Selecting audio source”

(page 3-14)

< >/< >,<ENTER>:

During voice recognition operation,

tilt up/down to highlight different

items, and push to select the high-

lighted item.

Audio operations are also possible by

tilting the switch up and down.

“Steering wheel mounted audio

control buttons (for U.S. and

Canada)” (page 3-13)

< >/< >:

The buttons are used mainly for the

vehicle information display operation.

Refer to the vehicle Owner’s Manual

for details.

During voice recognition operation,

<>can be used to return to the

previous screen.

< >:

Push + or - to adjust the volume.

< > :

Push the button to reject the incom-

ing call or to end an active call.

< >:

Push and hold to display the hands-

free phone operation screen. When

you receive a phone call, push this

button to answer the call.

Push this button to use the voice

recognition system. Push and hold to

end the voice recognition session.

“Giving voice commands”

(page 7-2)

When Apple CarPlay is active, pushing

and holding this button will start a Siri

voice control session.

“Siri operation” (page 5-21)

When Android Auto is active, pushing

2. Getting started

2-9

2. Getting started

and holding this button will start an

Android Auto voice control session.

“Operating with voice”

(page 5-25)

STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (for

Mexico)

INFO:

Steering wheel switches are mainly for the

vehicle information display control and

may not be able to operate the touch

screen display depending on the condi-

tions. Follow the pop-up guide messages

and labels shown on the vehicle informa-

tion display.

Some of the information displayed on the

vehicle information display are linked with

the touch screen display.

For other details of the vehicle informa-

tion display, refer to the vehicle Owner’s

Manual.

Steering wheel switches (Type A)

(if so equipped)

< > (TALK):

Push this button to use the voice

recognition system. Push and hold to

end the voice recognition session.

“Giving voice commands”

(page 7-2)

When Apple CarPlay is active, pushing

and holding this button will start a Siri

voice control session.

“Siri operation” (page 5-21)

When Android Auto is active, pushing

and holding this button will start an

Android Auto voice control session.

“Operating with voice”

(page 5-25)

< >/< >,<OK>:

During voice recognition operation,

tilt up/down to highlight different

items, and push to select the high-

lighted item.

Audio operations are also possible by

tilting the switch up and down.

“Steering wheel mounted audio

control buttons (for Mexico)”

(page 3-14)

< >:

Push to display the hands-free phone

operation screen.

When you receive a phone call, push

this button to answer the call.

“4. Hands-Free Phone”

< >/< >:

The buttons are used mainly for the

vehicle information display operation.

Refer to the vehicle Owner’s Manual

for details.

During voice recognition operation,

<>can be used to return to the

previous screen.

<SOURCE>:

Push to change the audio source to

the available mode.

“Selecting audio source”

(page 3-14)

2-10

< >:

Push + or - to adjust the volume.

Steering wheel switches (Type B)

(if so equipped)

< >/< >,<OK>:

During voice recognition operation,

tilt up/down to highlight different

items, and push to select the high-

lighted item.

Audio operations are also possible by

tilting the switch up and down.

“Steering wheel mounted audio

control buttons (for Mexico)”

(page 3-14)

<SOURCE>:

Push to change the audio source to

the available mode.

“Selecting audio source”

(page 3-14)

< >:

Push + or - to adjust the volume.

< >/< >:

The buttons are used mainly for the

vehicle information display operation.

Refer to the vehicle Owner’s Manual

for details.

During voice recognition operation,

<>can be used to return to the

previous screen.

< > (TALK) :

Push this button to use the voice

recognition system. Push and hold to

end the voice recognition session.

“Giving voice commands”

(page 7-2)

When Apple CarPlay is active, pushing

and holding this button will start a Siri

voice control session.

“Siri operation” (page 5-21)

When Android Auto is active, pushing

and holding this button will start an

Android Auto voice control session.

“Operating with voice”

(page 5-25)

< >:

Push to display the hands-free phone

operation screen.

When you receive a phone call, push

this button to answer the call.

“4. Hands-Free Phone”

DISPLAY COMMANDER (if so

equipped)

With this system, the same operations as

those for the control panel are possible

using the Display Commander.

<MAP/VOICE>:

Push to display the vehicle’s current

location on the map.

Push and hold to hear the current

guidance for a programmed route.

2. Getting started

2-11

2. Getting started

<MENU>:

Push to display the HOME MENU

screen.

< BACK>:

Push to go back to the previous

screen.

<OK>:

Push to enter the selected item.

If this button is pushed while a map is

displayed, the map menu is shown on

the display.

“Map Menu screen” (page 6-13)

Center dial/Slide switch:

Turning operation

Turn the dial to scroll the highlighted

item or to adjust a setting (treble,

brightness, etc.).

While the map screen is displayed,

adjust the map scale by turning the

dial.

Sliding operation

Depending on the screen, sliding the

slide switch can select areas on the

screen or scroll the pages.

“Basic operation” (page 2-14)

While the map screen is displayed,

scroll the map screen by sliding the

switch.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) CON-

NECTION PORT AND AUX (auxili-

ary) INPUT JACK

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

.Do not force the USB device into

the USB connection port. Inserting

the USB device tilted or up-side-

down into the port may damage

the port. Make sure that the USB

device is connected correctly into

the USB connection port.

.Do not grab the USB connection

port cover (if so equipped) when

pulling the USB device out of the

port. This could damage the port

and the cover.

.Do not leave the USB cable in a

place where it can be pulled unin-

tentionally. Pulling the cable may

damage the port.

The vehicle is equipped with USB connec-

tion port(s) and an AUX input jack. When

connected, the in-vehicle audio system

can play audio contents from the compa-

tible device.

Type A (if so equipped):

USB connection port 1 is located in the

media pocket. USB connection port 2 is

located at the rear of the center console

box. The AUX input jack is located in the

media pocket.

Media pocket

2-12

Rear of center console box

Type B (if so equipped):

Two USB connection ports and the AUX

input jack are located in the media pocket.

Media pocket

Type C (if so equipped):

USB connection port and the AUX input

jack are located on the lower part of the

instrument panel.

USB connection port and AUX input jack

AUX (Auxiliary) input jack:

Connect an audio player that accepts

a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) TRS connector (such

as an MP3 player etc.) to play music.

USB connection port 1, USB connec-

tion port 2 (if so equipped):

Connect a compatible device to play

media from an iPod, iPhone or a USB

memory device.

For models with two USB connection

ports:

The iPhone or the Android phone

must be connected to USB connec-

tion port 1 to be used for Apple Car-

Play and Android Auto.

USB connection port 1 is located in the

media pocket.

Type A: front side port

Type B: left side port

INFO:

.Refer to your AUX and USB device

manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the

device.

.Cables made by Apple Inc. should be

used to connect electronic devices

marketed by Apple Inc.

.Models with two USB connection

ports:

One USB memory device or one iPod

can be operated by the voice recogni-

tion system. When two USB memory

devices are connected, only one of the

devices can be operated by the voice

recognition system.

“Voice recognition settings”

(page 7-23)

2. Getting started

2-13

2. Getting started

STARTING SYSTEM

The system starts when the ignition

switch is placed in the ACC or ON position.

START-UP SCREEN

The start-up screen is displayed when the

ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON

position.

Models with NissanConnect

Services:

After an animated start-up screen is

displayed, a message screen will be dis-

played. Touch [OK] after reading and

agreeing to the message displayed on

the screen. If you do not agree to the

message, some of the functions on the

system will be disabled.

NOTE:

Do not keep the system running with

the engine or the hybrid system

stopped. Doing so may discharge the

vehicle battery (12V battery). When you

use the system, always keep the engine

or the hybrid system running.

BASIC OPERATION

The system can be operated with the

touch panel as well as switches on the

control panel, steering wheel and the

Display Commander (if so equipped).

This manual mainly describes the touch

panel operation.

SELECTING MENU FROM LAUNCH

BAR

Various system functions can be accessed

by touching the items on the Launch Bar

which is displayed on most of the main

menu screens. (The Launch Bar does not

appear on some screens such as scrolled

map screen, keyboard screen, etc.)

Touch the keys on the Launch Bar to

display the corresponding menu screens.

The following menus are available on the

Launch Bar.

.[Audio]

.[Phone]

.[Info]

.[MENU]

.[Map]

.[Navi]

.[Settings]

Launch Bar operation with Display Com-

mander (if so equipped):

2-14

Sliding the slide switch backwards will

enable the center dial operation of the

Launch Bar. Slide the switch forward to

return to operate Shortcuts with the

center dial.

Audio

Touching [Audio] on the Launch Bar will

display the audio screen. When [Audio] is

touched while the audio screen is dis-

played, the audio source menu screen will

be displayed.

“Selecting audio source” (page 3-14)

INFO:

Pushing <AUDIO> will also display the

audio screen.

Phone

Touching [Phone] on the Launch Bar will

display the phone menu screen.

INFO:

Models with <>:

.Pushing <>on the steering wheel

will also display the phone menu

screen.

“4. Hands-Free Phone”

Models with <>:

.Pushing and holding <>on the

steering wheel will also display the

phone menu screen.

“4. Hands-Free Phone”

Info

Touching [Info] on the Launch Bar will

display the information menu screen.

Various information can be accessed and

viewed from the information menu

screen.

“Information menu” (page 5-2)

Touching [MENU] on the Launch Bar will

display the center page of the HOME

MENU screen.

The HOME MENU screen consists of three

pages which can be personalized by

displaying preferred Shortcuts/Widgets.

“How to view and operate HOME

MENU screen” (page 2-19)

INFO:

Pushing <MENU> will also display the

HOME MENU screen.

Map

Touching [Map] on the Launch Bar will

display the map of the current vehicle

location.

INFO:

Pushing <MAP> will also display the map

screen.

“Displaying current vehicle location”

(page 6-3)

Navi

Touching [Navi] on the Launch Bar will

display the destination setting screen or

the route menu screen, depending on

whether a route is set for route guidance.

When a route is not set, menus used to set

destination for route guidance can be

accessed from this screen.

“Setting destination” (page 6-14)

When a route is set, menus for route

information and route editing are dis-

played on this screen.

“Route menu” (page 6-34)

Settings

Touching [Settings] on the Launch Bar will

display the setting menu screen.

Settings for the various functions in the

system can be changed from this screen.

2. Getting started

2-15

2. Getting started

“Settings menu” (page 2-23)

TOUCH PANEL OPERATION

The system can be controlled mainly by

the touch panel operation.

.Touch

Select a key on the screen to select the

item and to display the corresponding

screen.

INFO:

Some keys function differently depending

on whether the key is touched briefly or

when it is being touched and held for a

few seconds.

.Swipe/Flick

Menu screen pages will skip to the

next page when swiped/flicked hori-

zontally.

Some of the list screens can also be

scrolled by swiping/flicking on the

screen vertically.

MAIN SCREEN OPERATIONS

.Displaying previous screen

Touch [ ] to return to the screen

displayed previously.

2-16

.Horizontal scrolling

Touch [<] to scroll to the previous

page.

Touch [>] to scroll to the next page.

Indicates the position of the currently

displayed page.

Page scrolling with Display Com-

mander (if so equipped):

Slide the slide switch leftward to scroll

to the previous page. Slide the slide

switch rightward to scroll to the next

page.

.Vertical scrolling

Touch [ ]or[ ] to scroll the

message or list one item at a time.

Touch [ ]or[ ] to skip to the next

page.

Indicates the total number of items in

the list and the entry number of the

selected item.

2. Getting started

2-17

2. Getting started

.Scrolling list by selecting alphabet

Touch one of the alphabetical keys to

scroll the list to the section of the list

that begins with the letter selected.

Alphabetical scrolling with Display

Commander (if so equipped):

To operate the alphabetical keys for

alphabetical scrolling with the Display

Commander, slide the slide switch to

the left so that the alphabetical keys

can be selected by rotating the center

dial. Slide the slide switch rightward to

return to operate the list.

INFO:

Depending on the screens, swiping on the

touch screen can scroll pages vertically or

horizontally.

ADJUSTING SETTINGS

Touch adjustment keys, such as [-]/[+],

etc., to adjust each item. Each time a key is

touched, the indicator moves along the

bar.

For items with [ON] indicator, touch the

menu item to turn on/off the setting. The

indicator light will turn on when the

setting is turned on.

HOW TO INPUT LETTERS AND

NUMBERS

Basic operations to enter letters and

numbers are explained here.

Character and number input screens vary

depending on the conditions.

Alphabet input screen

Example

Entered characters are displayed.

Touch to delete the last character

entered.

Touch and hold to delete all the

characters entered.

Touch to change the type of key-

board.

[A-Z]: Displays alphabet input screen.

[]: Displays symbol input screen.

2-18

[123]: Displays number input screen.

Touch to switch between the upper-

case and lowercase character input

screen.

Touch to enter a space.

Touch to enter a character.

Touch to confirm the entry.

INFO:

.Push <BACK> briefly to delete the last

character entered. Push and hold the

button to delete all the characters

entered.

.For Mexico:

Searching with two or more words is

possible by touching [AND] between

keywords.

Number input screen

Example

Entered characters are displayed.

Touch to delete the last number

entered.

Touch and hold to delete all the

characters entered.

Touch to enter a number.

Touch to confirm the entry.

HOW TO VIEW AND OPERATE

HOME MENU SCREEN

Push <MENU> or touch [MENU] on the

Launch Bar to display the HOME MENU

screen.

On the HOME MENU screen which consists

of 3 pages, preferred Shortcuts and Wid-

gets can be laid out.

Shortcut icons:

Icons for frequently used menu items

can be placed on the HOME MENU

screens as Shortcuts. Shortcuts of

navigation, information, phone, audio

and setting menus are available.

Widget:

Useful information such as audio,

weather, clock, etc. can be displayed

as Widgets. Depending on the con-

2. Getting started

2-19

2. Getting started

tents, keys in the box can be touched

for operations.

INFO:

The HOME MENU screen can be edited.

“Customizing HOME MENU screen”

(page 2-21)

Default menus:

The following Shortcuts and Widgets are

set to be displayed as default on the

HOME MENU screen.

Available Shortcuts and Widgets may vary

depending on models and specifications.

For U.S. and Canada

Shortcuts/Widgets Content

[Home] Page 6-21

[Smartphone Con-

nection]

Displayed when

neither iPhone nor

Android phone is

connected.

[Apple CarPlay]

Page 5-20

[Android Auto]

Page 5-23

[Previous Destina-

tions]

Page 6-22

[Call History] Page 4-4

[Audio Information] Page 3-14

[SXM Traffic] Page 5-2

[SXM Fuel Prices] Page 5-2

[SXM Sports] Page 5-2

[SXM Stocks] Page 5-2

[SXM Weather] Page 5-2

[Edit Menu] Page 2-21

[Digital Clock] Digital clock is dis-

played.

*1: Displayed when iPhone is connected.

*2: Displayed when Android phone is

connected.

For Mexico

Shortcuts/Widgets Content

[Home] Page 6-21

[Smartphone Con-

nection]

Displayed when

neither iPhone nor

Android phone is

connected.

[Apple CarPlay]

Page 5-20

[Android Auto]

Page 5-23

[Previous Destina-

tions]

Page 6-22

[Call History] Page 4-4

[Audio Information] Page 3-14

[Edit Menu] Page 2-21

[Digital Clock] Digital clock is dis-

played.

*1: Displayed when iPhone is connected.

*2: Displayed when Android phone is

connected.

INFO:

.Default menus on the HOME MENU

screen are subject to change without

notice.

.A SiriusXM Travel Link or SiriusXM

Traffic subscription is necessary to

receive SXM information services (for

2-20

U.S. and Canada).

Customizing HOME MENU screen

The HOME MENU screen can be persona-

lized by selecting which Shortcuts and

Widgets to be displayed and where to

place them on the screen.

1. Push and hold <MENU> or touch and

hold [MENU] while the HOME MENU

screen is displayed.

2. Edit the Shortcuts and the Widgets on

the Edit Home Menu screen.

3. Touch [Save] to apply the change.

Following editing operations are available.

Moving an item:

1. Touch a Widget or a Shortcut icon you

wish to move. The arrows [ < ], [ > ], [ ]

or [ ] will appear by the icon. (Only [ <

] and [ > ] are available for the Widget.)

2. Touch the arrows to move the icon.

Adding an item:

1. Touch a blank box for Widget/Short-

cut.

2. Touch [ + ] displayed by the box.

3. Touch [Shortcut Icons] or [Widgets]

and select a preferred item you wish

to add.

.Available Shortcut categories

— [Audio Source]

— [Phone]

— [Info]

— [Navigation]

— [Settings]

.Available Widgets

— [Audio Information]

— [Current Conditions] (for U.S. and

Canada)

— [5-Day Weather Forecast] (for U.S.

and Canada)

— [Digital Clock]

— [Analog Clock]

INFO:

To add a Widget, 4 open Shortcut spots

are needed.

Deleting an item:

Touch [ X ] on the Shortcut or Widget you

wish to delete. Touch [Delete] to confirm.

Setting layout to default:

Touch [Reset] on the Edit Home Menu

screen. Touch [Yes] to confirm.

INFO:

.Touching [Settings] on the Launch Bar

and touching [Edit Home Menu] will

also display the Edit Home Menu

screen.

.Access to the SiriusXM Travel Link

services requires a SiriusXM subscrip-

tion (for U.S. and Canada).

“SiriusXM Travel Link (for U.S. and

Canada)” (page 5-18)

.Available Shortcuts/Widgets and the

default menus on the HOME MENU

screen are subject to change without

notice.

2. Getting started

2-21

2. Getting started

FUNCTIONS DISABLED WHILE DRIVING

Example

To ensure safe driving, some functions

cannot be operated or have limited op-

eration while the vehicle is in motion.

The on-screen text and keys for these

restricted functions will be “grayed-out” or

muted and cannot be selected while

driving. In some cases, a screen message

will appear indicating a restricted func-

tion.

Restricted functions while driving include:

.Character (letter and number) input

screen

.Scrolling and viewing of certain list

screens

.Displaying detail information and

touching item on some information

screen

.Adding/editing home location, ad-

dress book entries and current route

.Registering cellular phones

.Connecting Bluetooth® devices for the

first time

.Making a call by dial number and

handset phonebook

.Setting phone, NissanConnect

Ser-

vices (if so equipped), Bluetooth® func-

tions, etc.

2-22

.Various other settings

These functions will become available

again when the vehicle is not in motion.

Some of the destination setting functions

that become unavailable while driving can

be operated by voice recognition system.

Available voice commands may differ

depending on the language setting.

SYSTEM SETTINGS

The system settings can be changed for

convenience.

SETTINGS MENU

Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar and

touch a setting item you wish to adjust.

Available setting items may vary depend-

ing on models and specifications.

Available setting items

Setting item Result

[Bluetooth] Displays the Blue-

tooth® Audio and

Phone setting screen.

“Bluetooth® set-

tings” (page 2-26)

[Phone] Displays the Phone &

Mail setting screen.

“Phone and text

message assis-

tant settings”

(page 4-10)

[Navigation] Displays the naviga-

tion settings screen.

“Navigation set-

tings” (page 6-58)

[Sound] Displays the audio

settings screen.

“Audio settings”

(page 3-37)

[Display] Displays the display

settings screen.

“Display settings”

(page 2-24)

[Volume & Beeps] Displays the volume

adjustment screen.

“Volume and

Beeps settings”

(page 2-24)

2. Getting started

2-23

2. Getting started

[Clock] Displays the clock ad-

justment screen.

“Clock settings”

(page 2-25)

[Edit Home Menu] Displays the menu

editing screen.

“Customizing

HOME MENU

screen”

(page 2-21)

[NissanConnect

Services]

Displays the Nissan-

Connect

Services

settings screen.

“NissanConnect-

Services set-

tings” (page 5-17)

[Voice Recogni-

tion]

Displays the voice re-

cognition system set-

tings screen.

“Voice recogni-

tion settings”

(page 7-23)

[Camera] Displays the Camera

setting screen.

See vehicle Owner’s

Manual for details of

the monitor system.

[Language &

Units]

Displays the Language

and Units settings

screen.

“Language and

unit settings”

(page 2-25)

[Apple CarPlay

Settings]

Displays the Apple

CarPlay setting

screen.

“Apple CarPlay ”

(page 5-20)

[Android Auto Set-

tings]

Displays the Android

Auto setting screen.

“Android Auto”

(page 5-23)

DISPLAY SETTINGS

Menu items to adjust display settings are

available.

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Display].

3. Touch a preferred adjustment item

and adjust to the preferred setting.

Available setting items

Setting item Action

[Display] Turns the screen off.

Pushing and holding <>

will also turn off the screen.

Push the <>to turn the

screen back on.

[Brightness] Adjusts the brightness of

the display.

[Contrast] Adjusts the contrast of the

display.

[Background

Color]

Changes the background

color of the map screen.

Select the color mode from

[Day] and [Night].

Pushing <>will also

change the background

color.

VOLUME AND BEEPS SETTINGS

The volume of various functions including

audio, phone, navigation voice guidance,

and system beeps can be adjusted.

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Volume & Beeps].

Available setting items may vary depend-

ing on models and specifications.

2-24

Available setting items

Setting item Action

[Audio Vo-

lume]

Adjusts the volume level

of the audio system.

[Guidance Vo-

lume]

Adjusts the volume level

of the guidance voice and

the voice recognition sys-

tem voice responses.

[Ringtone] Adjusts the volume level

of the ringtone of incom-

ing calls.

[Incoming

Call/Siri]

Adjusts the volume level

of the incoming call or Siri.

[Outgoing Call] Adjusts the outgoing call

volume.

[NissanCon-

nect Svcs.]

Adjusts the volume level

of “text-to-speech” for

text messaging and Nis-

sanConnect

Services

announcements.

[Button Beeps] Turns on/off the button

beep sound and alarm for

a prohibited operations.

[Guidance

Voice]

Turns on/off the voice

guidance.

CLOCK SETTINGS

Clock settings of the system can be

changed.

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Clock].

Available setting items

Setting item Action

[On-screen

Clock]

Sets the clock display on/

off. When this item is on,

the clock display appears.

[Clock For-

mat (24h)]

Turns on/off the 24-hour

display mode. When turned

off, the clock is set to the

12-hour mode.

[Offset (hour)] Adjusts the offset value

(hour).

[Offset (min)] Adjusts the offset value

(minutes).

[Daylight

Savings Time]

Turns on/off the daylight

saving time setting.

[Time Zone] Select an appropriate time

zone from the list. When

selecting [Auto], the system

selects the time zone

automatically.

LANGUAGE AND UNIT SETTINGS

This changes the display language and

measurement unit used in the system.

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Language & Units].

Available setting items

Setting item Action

[Select Lan-

guage]

Selects the system lan-

guage. The language

setting is applied to the

touch screen display, voice

announcements, the voice

recognition system.

It can also be applied to

the vehicle information

display.

[Select Units] Selects the system unit.

The unit setting can also

be applied to the informa-

tion vehicle display.

INFO:

Do not change the position of the ignition

switch while changing the language.

If the selected language is also supported

by the vehicle information display, a con-

firmation message asking if you would like

to also change the language for the

vehicle information display is displayed.

Select [Yes] to change the language on

2. Getting started

2-25

2. Getting started

the vehicle information display.

CONNECTING BLUETOOTH® DE-

VICE

Your vehicle is equipped with the Blue-

tooth® Hands-Free Phone System and

Bluetooth® audio device. If you are an

owner of a compatible Bluetooth® en-

abled cellular phone or Bluetooth® audio

device, you can set up the wireless con-

nection between your cellular phone and

the in-vehicle phone module or Blue-

tooth® audio and in-vehicle audio module.

With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you

can make or receive a telephone call with

your cellular phone in your pocket and

listen to Bluetooth® audio.

Connecting cellular phone/audio

device

To use the Bluetooth® device with the in-

vehicle system for the first time, the device

connection operation is required.

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Bluetooth] and touch [Connect

Device]. A message is displayed.

3. Touch [Yes] to connect a cellular

phone. Touch [No] to connect an audio

device and operate as guided by the

system. (Operations may differ de-

pending on the device.)

NOTE:

Some cellular phones or other devices

may cause interference or a buzzing

noise to come from the audio system

speakers. Storing the device in a differ-

ent location may reduce or eliminate the

noise.

INFO:

.Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices can be

connected. If 5 devices are already

connected, one of the devices must

first be deleted before another device

can be connected.

“Bluetooth® settings” (page 2-26)

.The pairing procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellu-

lar phone. See the cellular phone Own-

er’s Manual for the details.

.For U.S. and Canada:

Visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/

for a recommended Bluetooth®

device.

.For Mexico:

Consult a NISSAN dealer for informa-

tion regarding Bluetooth® device con-

nection to your vehicle.

Bluetooth® settings

The Bluetooth® settings can be changed

according to your preference.

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Bluetooth].

3. Touch a preferred item.

Available setting items

Setting item Action

[Bluetooth] Turns the Bluetooth®

connection to the vehicle

on/off.

[Connect De-

vice]

Bluetooth® devices can

be connected to the in-

vehicle system.

[Select BT De-

vice]

Registered Bluetooth®

devices are shown on the

list. Select a device you

wish to use from the list.

You can also edit the

name, delete registered

devices or display infor-

mation of the registered

device.

[Edit Bluetooth

Information]

The in-vehicle system

name and the PIN code

can be changed. A device

address can also be

viewed.

2-26

INFO:

From [Edit Bluetooth Information], the

device name that appears on the screen

can be changed and be renamed from the

name set as default to the preferred name

(such as “Steve’s Car” for example).

2. Getting started

2-27

2. Getting started

MEMO

2-28

3 Audio system
Audio operation precautions .............................................. 3-2
Radio ................................................................................................ 3-2
Compact Disc (CD) player ................................................ 3-4
USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port....... 3-5
Compressed Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)......... 3-7
Bluetooth® streaming audio ......................................... 3-9
Names and functions of audio
control buttons ........................................................................... 3-10
Audio main buttons (for U.S. and Canada) ...... 3-10
Audio main buttons (for Mexico) ............................ 3-12
Steering wheel mounted audio control
buttons (for U.S. and Canada) ................................... 3-13
Steering wheel mounted audio control
buttons (for Mexico) .......................................................... 3-14
Audio operations ....................................................................... 3-14
Audio main operation ................................................... 3-14
Radio........................................................................................... 3-15
Compact Disc (CD) player .......................................... 3-21
USB memory device player ....................................... 3-24
iPod player ............................................................................. 3-28
Bluetooth® audio .............................................................. 3-32
Auxiliary (AUX) devices .................................................. 3-35
Audio settings.............................................................................. 3-37
Audio adjustments when map, audio or
HOME MENU is displayed............................................ 3-38
CD/USB memory device care and cleaning......... 3-38
CD ................................................................................................. 3-38
USB memory device ....................................................... 3-39

3. Audio system

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAU-

TIONS

CAUTION

.Operate the audio system only

when the vehicle engine or the

hybrid system is running. Operat-

ing the audio system for extended

periods of time with the engine or

the hybrid system turned off can

discharge the vehicle battery.

.Do not allow the system to get wet.

Excessive moisture such as spilled

liquids may cause the system to

malfunction.

RADIO

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position before turning on the radio. If you

listen to the radio with the engine or the

hybrid system not running, the ignition

switch should be placed in the ACC

position.

Radio reception is affected by station

signal strength, distance from radio trans-

mitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and

other external influences. Intermittent

changes in reception quality normally

are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the

vehicle may influence radio reception

quality.

Radio reception

Your radio system is equipped with state-

of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance

radio reception. These circuits are de-

signed to extend reception range, and to

enhance the quality of that reception.

However there are some general charac-

teristics of both FM and AM radio signals

that can affect radio reception quality in a

moving vehicle, even when the finest

equipment is used. These characteristics

are completely normal in a given recep-

tion area, and do not indicate any mal-

function in your radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly

change because of vehicle movement.

Buildings, terrain, signal distance and

interference from other vehicles can work

against ideal reception. Described below

are some of the factors that can affect

your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices

may cause interference or a buzzing noise

to come from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

FM radio reception

Range: the FM range is normally limited to

25 to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with

monaural (single station) FM having

slightly more range than stereo FM. Ex-

ternal influences may sometimes interfere

with FM station reception even if the FM

station is within 25 miles (40 km). The

strength of the FM signal is directly related

to the distance between the transmitter

and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-

sight path, exhibiting many of the same

characteristics as light. For example they

will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves

away from a station transmitter, the

3-2

signals will tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interfer-

ence from buildings, large hills or due to

antenna position, usually in conjunction

with increased distance from the station

transmitter, static or flutter can be heard.

This can be reduced by lowering the treble

setting to reduce the treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the re-

flective characteristics of FM signals, di-

rect and reflected signals reach the

receiver at the same time. The signals

may cancel each other, resulting in mo-

mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM radio reception

AM signals, because of their low fre-

quency, can bend around objects and skip

along the ground. In addition, the signals

can bounce off the ionosphere and be

bent back to earth. Because of these

characteristics, AM signals are also sub-

ject to interference as they travel from

transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas

with many tall buildings. It can also occur

for several seconds during ionospheric

turbulence even in areas where no ob-

stacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electri-

cal power lines, electric signs and even

traffic lights.

HD Radio

Technology reception

(for U.S.)

HD Radio Technology reception needs to

be activated to receive HD Radio broad-

casts.

“Radio Menu” (page 3-18)

This enables you to receive radio broad-

casts digitally (where available), providing

a better quality sound with clear recep-

tion. When this feature is not activated or

HD Radio broadcasts are not available,

you will receive analog radio (AM/FM)

broadcasts.

Satellite radio reception (for U.S.

and Canada)

When the satellite radio is used for the first

time or the battery has been replaced, the

satellite radio may not work properly. This

is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10

minutes with the satellite radio ON and

the vehicle outside of any metal or large

building for the satellite radio to receive all

of the necessary data.

SiriusXM services require a subscription

after trial period and are sold separately

or as a package. The satellite service is

available only in the 48 contiguous USA

and DC. SiriusXM satellite service is also

available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca.

The satellite radio performance may be

affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks

the satellite radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo near the

satellite antenna.

A buildup of ice on the satellite radio

antenna can affect satellite radio perfor-

mance. Remove the ice to restore satellite

radio reception.

3. Audio system

3-3

3. Audio system

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER

.Do not force a compact disc into the

CD insert slot. This could damage the

CD and/or CD player.

.Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or

CD player.

.During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the

humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD

and dehumidify or ventilate the player

completely.

.The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

.The CD player sometimes cannot

function when the passenger com-

partment temperature is extremely

high. Decrease the temperature before

use.

.Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or

packaging.

.Do not expose the CD to direct sun-

light.

.CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,

scratched, covered with fingerprints

or that have pin holes may not work

properly.

.The following CDs may not work

properly:

— Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

— Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

— Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

.Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion.

— 3.1 in (8 cm) discs

— CDs that are not round

— CDs with a paper label

— CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

.This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs. It has no capabilities to

record or burn CDs.

.If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

Disc read error:

Indicates a CLV, Focus, TOC or Access

error. Check and reinsert the CD. Make

sure that it is inserted correctly.

Please eject disc:

Indicates a mechanism error. If the CD

can be ejected, eject and reinsert the

CD. If the CD cannot be ejected, it is

recommended you visit a NISSAN deal-

er for service.

Unplayable file:

Indicates that a readable file is not

found on the inserted CD. Check the

data in your CD.

3-4

USB (Universal Serial Bus) CON-

NECTION PORT

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

.Do not force the USB device into

the USB connection port. Inserting

the USB device tilted or up-side-

down into the port may damage

the port. Make sure that the USB

device is connected correctly into

the USB connection port.

.Do not grab the USB connection

port cover (if so equipped) when

pulling the USB device out of the

port. This could damage the port

and the cover.

.Do not leave the USB cable in a

place where it can be pulled unin-

tentionally. Pulling the cable may

damage the port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB

device. USB devices should be purchased

separately as necessary.

This system cannot be used to format

USB devices. To format a USB device, use a

personal computer.

In some states/areas, the USB device for

the front seats plays only sound without

images for regulatory reasons, even when

the vehicle is parked.

This system supports various USB mem-

ory devices, USB hard drives and iPod

players. Some USB devices may not be

supported by this system.

.Partitioned USB devices may not be

played correctly.

.Some characters used in other lan-

guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are

not displayed properly on the display.

Using English language characters

with a USB device is recommended.

General notes for USB use:

Refer to your device manufacturer’s own-

er information regarding the proper care

of the device.

Notes for iPod use:

.Improperly plugging in the iPod may

cause a checkmark to be displayed on

and off (flickering). Always make sure

that the iPod is connected properly.

.Audiobooks may not play in the same

order as they appear on an iPod.

3. Audio system

3-5

3. Audio system

Specification chart for USB

Supported media USB2.0

Supported file systems FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Files via folder: 255, Folders: 512 (including root folder), Files: 8000

Tag information (Song title, Artist name and

Album name)

ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)

WMA tag (WMA only)

AAC tag (AAC only)

Format Sampling frequency Supported bitrate

MP3 *1 MPEG1 Layer-3 32, 44.1, 48 kHz 32-320 kbps

MPEG2 16, 22.05, 24 kHz 8-160 kbps

WMA *2 8, 11.025, 16 ,22.05, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz 12-192 kbps

AAC (MPEG4) *3 (Extension “m4a” only) 11.025, 16, 22.05, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz 8-320 kbps

*1 MPEG2.5 is not supported.

*2 WMA7, WMA8, WMA9, WMA9.1, WMA9.2 are supported. (WMA9 Professional, Lossless, Voice are not supported.)

*3 Only AAC files encoded by iTunes are supported. HE-AAC (High-Efficiency) is not supported.

3-6

COMPRESSED AUDIO FILES (MP3/

WMA/AAC)

Explanation of terms

.MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is

the most well-known compressed di-

gital audio file format. This format

allows for near “CD quality” sound,

but at a fraction of the size of normal

audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio

track can reduce the file size by

approximately a 10:1 ratio (Sampling:

44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with

virtually no perceptible loss in quality.

The compression reduces certain

parts of sound that seem inaudible to

most people.

.WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is

a compressed audio format created by

Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The

WMA codec offers greater file com-

pression than the MP3 codec, enabling

storage of more digital audio tracks in

the same amount of space when

compared to MP3s at the same level

of quality.

.Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number

of bits per second used by a digital

music file. The size and quality of a

compressed digital audio file is deter-

mined by the bit rate used when

encoding the file.

.Sampling frequency — Sampling fre-

quency is the rate at which the sam-

ples of a signal are converted from

analog to digital (A/D conversion) per

second.

.Multisession — Multisession is one of

the methods for writing data to media.

Writing data once to the media is

called a single session, and writing

more than once is called a multises-

sion.

.ID3/WMA tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file

that contains information about the

digital music file such as song title,

artist, album title, encoding bit rate,

track time duration, etc. ID3 tag in-

formation is displayed on the Album/

Artist/Track title line on the display.

.AAC — Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is

a compressed audio format. AAC of-

fers greater file compression than MP3

and enables music file creation and

storage at the same quality as MP3.

Playback order

.The folder names of folders not con-

taining compressed audio files are not

shown on the display.

.The playback order is the order in

which the files were written by the

writing software, so the files might not

3. Audio system

3-7

3. Audio system

play in the desired order.

.Music playback order of compressed

audio files is as illustrated.

Specification chart for CD

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported ver-

sions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1 Audio Layer3, MPEG2 Audio Layer3

Sampling frequency MPEG1 Audio Layer3: 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz

MPEG2 Audio Layer3: 16kHz, 22.05kHz, 24kHz

Bit rate MPEG1 Audio Layer3: 32 kbps - 320 kbps

MPEG2 Audio Layer3: 8 kbps - 160 kbps

WMA*2

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9, WMA9.1, WMA9.2

Bit rate/Sampling fre-

quency

Bit rate: Ver7, Ver8: 32-192kbps Ver9,Ver9.1,Ver9.2:32-192kbps, VBR

Sampling frequency: Ver7, Ver8:8k/11.025k/16k/22k/32k/44.1k Ver9,Ver9.1,

Ver9.2:8k/11.025k/16k/22k/32k/44.1k/48 kHz

AAC*3 Bit rate/Sampling fre-

quency

Bit rate: 8-256 kbps, VBR

Sampling frequency: 11.025-48kHz

Tag information (Song title, Artist name and Album

name)

ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)

WMA tag (WMA only)

AAC tag (AAC only)

Folder levels CD, CD-R, CD-RW: Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 510 (Max.

255 files for one folder)

Displayable character codes*4 01: SHIFT-JIS, ASCII, ISO-8859-1, UTF-8, UTF-16 BOM, UTF-16 Big Endian, UTF-16 Little

Endian, 02: UNICODE, 03: UTF-16

3-8

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

*3 Made by iTunes.

*4 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

.Some Bluetooth® audio devices may

not be recognized by the in-vehicle

audio system.

.It is necessary to set up the wireless

connection between a compatible

Bluetooth® audio device and the in-

vehicle Bluetooth® module before

using the Bluetooth® streaming audio.

.The Bluetooth® streaming audio may

stop playing when

— receiving a hands-free call.

— checking the connection to the

hands-free phone.

— connecting the hands-free phone or

the audio device.

— downloading the phonebook mem-

ory from the connected cellular

phone.

.Do not place a Bluetooth® audio de-

vice in an area surrounded by metal or

far away from the in-vehicle Blue-

tooth® module to prevent tone quality

degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

.While an audio device is connected

through a Bluetooth® wireless con-

nection, the battery of the device

may discharge quicker than usual.

.This system supports the Bluetooth®

Advanced Audio Distribution Profile

(A2DP) and Audio/Video Remote Con-

trol Profile (AVRCP).

.Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Blue-

tooth® functions share the same fre-

quency band (2.4 GHz). Using the

Bluetooth® and the wireless LAN func-

tions at the same time may slow down

or disconnect the communication and

cause undesired noise. It is recom-

mended that you turn off the wireless

LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Bluetooth®

functions.

3. Audio system

3-9

3. Audio system

NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF

AUDIO CONTROL BUTTONS

AUDIO MAIN BUTTONS (for U.S. and Canada)

Type A (if so equipped)

Type B (if so equipped)

3-10

Type C (if so equipped)

<MENU>:

Push this button to go to the menu

screen.

< >:

Push to eject a CD.

CD slot:

Insert a CD with the label side facing

up.

< >/< >:

Selecting and fast-forwarding/re-

winding tracks and radio station/

channel scanning can be performed.

<AUDIO>:

Push to display the audio screen of

the previously selected source.

Push again to display the audio

source list screen.

<VOL/ >/<VOLUME/ >:

Push to turn on/off the audio system.

Turn to adjust the volume.

<TUNE·SCROLL/SOUND>:

Turn to manually tune AM/FM, to

select SiriusXM categories and to

select MP3/WMA/AAC folders. If no

folders are found, tracks will be

skipped.

Push to select the highlighted item

when a menu screen is displayed.

When this button is pushed when no

item on the screen is highlighted, the

audio settings can be changed.

“Audio adjustments when map,

audio or HOME MENU is dis-

played” (page 3-38)

3. Audio system

3-11

3. Audio system

AUDIO MAIN BUTTONS (for Mexico)

Type A (if so equipped)

Type B (if so equipped)

<MENU>:

Push this button to go to the menu

screen.

< >:

Push to eject a CD.

CD slot:

Insert a CD with the label side facing

up.

< >/< >:

Selecting and fast-forwarding/re-

winding tracks and radio station

scanning can be performed.

<AUDIO>:

Push to display the audio screen of

the previously selected source.

Push again to display the audio

source list screen.

<VOLUME/ >:

Push to turn on/off the audio system.

Turn to adjust the volume.

< /SOUND>:

Turn the dial to scroll the highlighted

item.

Push to select the highlighted item

when a menu screen is displayed.

When this button is pushed when no

3-12

item on the screen is highlighted, the

audio settings can be changed.

“Audio adjustments when map,

audio or HOME MENU is dis-

played” (page 3-38)

STEERING WHEEL MOUNTED

AUDIO CONTROL BUTTONS (for

U.S. and Canada)

Type A (if so equipped)

Type B (if so equipped)

Type C (if so equipped)

< >/< >:

Tilting the switch up/down while the

audio system is turned on can oper-

ate the audio system such as chan-

ging tracks and radio preset stations

or channels.

<SOURCE>:

Push the switch to change the mode

to available audio source.

< > (Volume control):

Push + or - side of the switch to adjust

the volume.

INFO:

Steering wheel switches are mainly for the

vehicle information display control and

may not be able to operate the touch

screen display depending on the condi-

tions. Follow the pop-up guide messages

and labels shown on the vehicle informa-

tion display.

3. Audio system

3-13

3. Audio system

STEERING WHEEL MOUNTED

AUDIO CONTROL BUTTONS (for

Mexico)

Type A (if so equipped)

Type B (if so equipped)

< >/< >:

Tilting the switch up/down while the

audio system is turned on can oper-

ate the audio system such as chan-

ging tracks and radio preset stations.

<SOURCE>:

Push the switch to change the mode

to available audio source.

< > (Volume control):

Push + or - side of the switch to adjust

the volume.

INFO:

Steering wheel switches are mainly for the

vehicle information display control and

may not be able to operate the touch

screen display depending on the condi-

tions. Follow the pop-up guide messages

and labels shown on the vehicle informa-

tion display.

AUDIO OPERATIONS

AUDIO MAIN OPERATION

Turning audio system on/off

The ignition switch must be in the ACC or

ON position to turn on the audio system.

Push <VOL/ >or <VOLUME/ > to turn

on the last audio source that was playing

immediately before the system was

turned off. Pushing <AUDIO> will also turn

on the audio system and the correspond-

ing audio screen will be displayed for

operation. To turn off the audio system,

push <VOL/ >or <VOLUME/ > again.

Selecting audio source

1. Push <AUDIO> or touch [Audio] on the

Launch Bar when the audio screen is

displayed.

3-14

2. Select an item from the audio source

menu screens.

INFO:

Touching [Source] on the upper left cor-

ner of the audio screen will also display

the audio source menu screen.

RADIO

How to view radio screen

3. Audio system

3-15

3. Audio system

The radio screen can be viewed and

operated on the touch screen display.

[AM Menu]/[FM Menu]/[SXM Menu]

(for U.S. and Canada):

[AM Menu]/[FM Menu] (for Mexico):

Touch to display the radio menu

screen.

“Radio Menu” (page 3-18)

[Source]:

Touch to display the audio source

screen to select the other audio

source.

“Selecting audio source”

(page 3-14)

Preset number:

A preset number is displayed if the

current frequency is stored as a pre-

set station or channel (if so equipped).

Audio source indicator:

Indicates the currently selected audio

source.

Reception information display:

Reception information currently avail-

able such as frequency, station, or

channel (if so equipped) name, etc. are

displayed.

Turn direction indicator:

When a route to the destination is set,

turning direction and the distance to

the next turn is displayed.

TAG indicator (for U.S.):

TAG indicator is displayed if the

iTunes Tagging information exists in

the HD Radio broadcast signal.

“Radio Menu” (page 3-18)

Preset list:

To listen to a preset station, touch the

corresponding key in the preset list.

Touch [ < ] or [ > ] to scroll the preset

list. Touch and hold one of the keys in

the preset list to store the station or

channel (if so equipped) currently

tuned to.

“Presetting” (page 3-17)

Mode indicator (for U.S.):

On AM and FM screens, HD Radio icon

will appear when HD Radio mode

setting is turned on.

“Radio Menu” (page 3-18)

“Live” will appear when in ballgame

mode during reception of the HD

Radio broadcast.

INFO:

.An icon indicating the signal strength

appears on the SXM screen.

.HD Radio (for U.S.) reception needs to

be activated to receive HD Radio

broadcasts. This enables you to re-

ceive radio broadcasts digitally (where

available), providing a better quality

sound with clear reception. When this

feature is not activated or HD Radio

broadcasts are not available, you will

receive analog radio (AM/FM) broad-

casts.

“Radio Menu” (page 3-18)

Radio operation (for U.S. and Ca-

nada)

Radio activation and band selection:

To listen to the radio, turn on the audio

system and select a preferred radio band

on the audio source menu screen.

“Selecting audio source” (page 3-14)

3-16

INFO:

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,

the radio will automatically change from

stereo to monaural reception.

Tuning:

To tune to stations/channels manually,

turn <TUNE·SCROLL/SOUND> until the

preferred station is selected.

Seek tuning:

Tilt and hold <>/< > on the steering

wheel to seek up/down to the next

receivable broadcast station or channel.

Scan tuning:

To scan tune the stations/channels,

touch [FM Menu], [AM Menu] or [SXM

Menu] on the radio screen and then touch

[SCAN]. The stations/channels will be

tuned from low to high frequencies and

stop at each broadcasting station/chan-

nel for several seconds. Touching [SCAN]

again during this period of several sec-

onds will stop scan tuning and the radio

will remain tuned to that station/channel.

Pushing and holding <>/< > will also

scan tune the stations/channels.

Presetting:

Up to 6 for AM, 12 for FM and 18 for SXM

stations/channels can be registered in the

preset list.

1. Select a radio band (AM, FM or SXM).

2. Tune to the station/channel you wish

to store in the preset list.

3. Touch and hold one of the preset

numbers in the preset list.

4. The information such as frequency

(AM/FM), channel number (SXM), etc.

will be displayed on the preset list.

To select and listen to the preset stations/

channels, tilt <>/< > on the steering

wheel briefly or touch a preferred station/

channel on the preset list on the radio

screen.

Radio operation (for Mexico)

Radio activation and band selection:

To listen to the radio, turn on the audio

system and select a preferred radio band

on the audio source menu screen.

“Selecting audio source” (page 3-14)

INFO:

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,

the radio will automatically change from

stereo to monaural reception.

Tuning:

To tune to stations manually, push

<>/< > until the preferred station is

selected.

Seek tuning:

Tilt and hold <>/< > on the steering

wheel to seek up/down to the next

receivable broadcast station.

Scan tuning:

To scan tune the stations, touch [FM

Menu] or [AM Menu] on the radio screen

and then touch [SCAN]. The stations will

be tuned from low to high frequencies

and stop at each broadcasting station for

several seconds. Touching [SCAN] again

during this period of several seconds will

stop scan tuning and the radio will remain

tuned to that station.

Pushing and holding <>/< > will also

scan tune the stations.

3. Audio system

3-17

3. Audio system

Presetting:

Up to 6 for AM or 12 for FM stations can be

registered in the preset list.

1. Select a radio band (AM or FM).

2. Tune to the station you wish to store in

the preset list.

3. Touch and hold one of the preset

numbers in the preset list.

4. Information such as frequency (AM/

FM), etc. will be displayed on the preset

list.

To select and listen to the preset stations,

tilt <

>/< > on the steering wheel

briefly or touch a preferred station on

the preset list on the radio screen.

Radio Menu

Touch [FM Menu], [AM Menu], and [SXM Menu] (for U.S. and Canada) on the FM, AM or SXM (for U.S. and Canada) screen to display the

corresponding screen.

The following items are available.

[FM Menu]/[AM Menu]:

[SCAN] Touch to scan tune the stations.

“Radio operation (for U.S. and Canada)” (page 3-16)

“Radio operation (for Mexico)” (page 3-17)

[Tag]

(HD Radio broadcasts only)

Touch to register the tag information for iTunes Tagging. If an iPod is plugged in

after the registration, the tag information can be stored in an iPod and be used to

purchase the songs via iTunes.

3-18

[Station List]

(for U.S. and Canada)

Touch to display the available station list.

Touch [Update Station List] to update the station list.

[HD Radio Mode]

(HD Radio broadcasts only)

When this item is turned on, the analog and digital reception switches auto-

matically. When this item is turned off, the reception is fixed in the analog mode.

[SXM Menu] (for U.S. and Canada):

[SCAN] Touch to scan tune the channels.

“Radio operation (for U.S. and Canada)” (page 3-16)

[Tag] Touch to register the tag information for iTunes Tagging. If an iPod is plugged in

after the registration, the tag information can be stored in an iPod and be used to

purchase the songs via iTunes.

[Replay] Up to 30 minutes of the broadcast of the channel that has been tuned in to can be

replayed. Touch to select from [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] and [

[Favorite] Touch to display a pop-up screen to register the content of an active channel. On

the registration screen, touch [Artist] to save to a list of favorite artist. Touch [Song]

to save to a list of favorite songs. Touch [Cancel] to close the registration screen.

[Categories/Genres] Touch to display the category/genre list.

[Customize Channel List] Touch to customize the channel list. Only the selected channels will be tuned in to

when you seek or scan the channels. You can select each item or select [All Select]/

[All Clear].

[Favorite Artists] Touch to display a list of saved artists. Up to 8 artists can be stored. To turn on alerts

for a favorite artist, select the artist and touch [Turn Alerts ON]. Touch [Delete All

Favorites] to delete all the registered favorite artists.

[Favorite Songs] Touch to display a list of saved songs. Up to 8 songs can be stored. To turn on alerts

for a favorite song, select the song and touch [Turn Alerts ON]. Touch [Delete All

Favorites] to delete all the registered favorite songs.

[Direct Tune] Touch to display the keypad to enter the frequency and directly tune to the channel.

Touch [Now Playing] to return to the SXM screen.

[Artist Alert History] Touch to display the artist alert history.

3. Audio system

3-19

3. Audio system

[Song Alert History] Touch to display the song alert history. Touch [Now Playing] to return to the SXM

screen.

[Alert Settings] [Alerts for Artists] Touch to turn on/off the alert notice.

Favorite artists and songs can be registered to receive an alert notice when a song

of the registered conditions is on the radio. To tune to the respective channel, touch

[Tune] on the alert screen. The alert can be ignored by touching [Cancel].

[Alerts for Songs]

[Alerts on non-Audio

screens]

[Channel Lock Settings]* [Use Channel Lock] Turn this item on to activate the channel lock function.

[Passcode Change] Touch to display the keyboard screen to change the passcode.

[Lock Channel Setting] Touch to display the Lock Channel setting screen. Touch and turn on the indicator

of the channels on the list you wish to lock out.

*: The default passcode is “1234”.

INFO:

.SiriusXM services require a subscrip-

tion after trial period and are sold

separately or as a package. The satel-

lite service is available only in the 48

contiguous USA and DC. SiriusXM sa-

tellite service is also available in Cana-

da; see www.siriusxm.ca.

.It may take some time to receive the

activation signal after the initiation of

the SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscrip-

tion. After receiving the activation

signal, an available channel list will

automatically be updated in the radio.

Change the position of the ignition

switch from LOCK to ACC to update

the SiriusXM channel list.

3-20

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER

How to view CD screen

[CD Menu]:

Touch to display the CD Menu screen.

“CD Menu” (page 3-23)

[Source]:

Touch to switch to the source select

screen.

“Selecting audio source”

(page 3-14)

Track information:

Track information such as the song

title, artist name and album name are

displayed.

Audio source indicator:

Indicates that CD is currently selected

among other sources.

Turn direction indicator:

When a route to the destination is set,

the turn direction and the distance to

the next turn are displayed.

Play time and progress bar:

The play time of the track is displayed.

The bar indicates the progress in

playing the current track.

CD operation keys:

Touch an icon for operations.

3. Audio system

3-21

3. Audio system

[ ] Each time [ ] is touched, the

repeat mode changes.

“Changing play mode”

(page 3-22)

[] Touch once to return to the

beginning of the current track.

Touch again to select the pre-

vious track. Touch and hold to

rewind the current track.

[] Touch to play the track.

[] Touch to pause the track.

[] Touch to select the next track.

Touch and hold to fast-forward

the track.

[] Each time [ ] is touched, the

random mode changes.

“Changing play mode”

(page 3-22)

Track and folder number:

Indicates the track number and the

folder number.

Data type indicator:

Indicates the type of data currently

playing.

CD player operation

Loading:

Insert a CD into the slot with the label side

facing up. The CD will be guided auto-

matically into the slot and start playing.

After loading the CD, the CD screen will

appear on the display.

Activation and playing:

The CD mode can be also selected from

the source list with a CD loaded.

“Selecting audio source” (page 3-14)

Skipping tracks:

To skip the tracks, push<>/< >,

touch [ ]/[ ] on the screen, or tilt up/

down <>/< > on the steering wheel

repeatedly until preferred track is se-

lected.

INFO:

Depending on the condition, skipping to

the previous track may require pushing

the button or touching the key twice.

Pushing the button or touching the key

once may only restart the currently track

from the beginning.

Changing folders:

To change folders, touch [CD Menu] and

touch [Folder List].

“CD Menu” (page 3-23)

For U.S. and Canada

Turn <TUNE·SCROLL/SOUND> to skip to

different folders. If no folders are found,

tracks will be skipped.

Fast-forwarding/rewinding:

The following operation methods are

available for rewinding and fast-forward-

ing the track.

Control panel operation:

.Push and hold <>/< >.

.Touch and hold [ ]/[ ].

Steering wheel switch operation:

.Tilt and hold <>/< > on the

steering wheel.

Changing play mode:

Repeat mode

Touch [ ] on the CD screen to change

the repeat mode as follows.

.CD:

[Disc] [1 Track]

3-22

.CD with compressed audio files:

[All] ?[1 Track] ?[1 Folder] ?[All]

Random mode

Touch [ ] on the CD screen to change

the random mode as follows.

.CD:

(off) [Disc]

.CD with compressed audio files:

(off) ?[1 Folder] ?[All] ?(off)

Ejecting CD:

Push <>to eject a CD. If the CD is

ejected and left unremoved, it will be

reloaded into the slot for protection.

INFO:

The ignition switch must be placed in the

ACC or ON position in order for the CD to

eject.

CD Menu

Touch [CD Menu] on the CD screen to

display the CD menu screen.

The following items are available.

[Now Playing] Touch to return to the CD

screen.

[SCAN] Touch to scan the tracks on

the CD. During scanning,

the first several seconds of

all the tracks will be played.

Touching [SCAN] again will

cancel the scanning mode

and the CD will return to

play normally from the

track which is playing.

[Folder List]* Touch to display the folder

list. Touch an item on the

list to select the folder.

Touch [ ] and go back to

the previous screen to se-

lect tracks in the folder.

Track List A list of the tracks on the CD

is displayed. Touch an item

on the list to select the

track.

*: Displayed only when available.

3. Audio system

3-23

3. Audio system

USB MEMORY DEVICE PLAYER

Connecting USB memory device

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

.Do not force the USB device into

the USB connection port. Inserting

the USB device tilted or up-side-

down into the port may damage

the port. Make sure that the USB

device is connected correctly into

the USB connection port.

.Do not grab the USB connection

port cover (if so equipped) when

pulling the USB device out of the

port. This could damage the port

and the cover.

.Do not leave the USB cable in a

place where it can be pulled unin-

tentionally. Pulling the cable may

damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s own-

er information regarding the proper use

and care of the device.

When compatible storage devices are

plugged into the port, compatible audio

files on the storage devices can be played

through the vehicle’s audio system.

For the location of the USB connection

port(s):

“USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connec-

tion Port and AUX (auxiliary) input

jack” (page 2-12)

INFO:

Models with two USB connection ports:

Only one of the two connected USB

devices can be operated with the voice

recognition system.

“Voice recognition settings”

(page 7-23)

3-24

How to view USB screen [USB Menu]:

Touch to switch to the USB Menu

screen.

“USB Menu” (page 3-27)

[Source]:

Touch to switch to the source select

screen.

“Selecting audio source”

(page 3-14)

Track information:

Track information such as the song

title, artist name and album name are

displayed.

Audio source indicator:

Models with one USB connection port:

Indicates that an USB device is cur-

rently selected among other sources.

Models with two USB connection

ports:

Indicates which USB memory device

(USB1 or USB2) is currently selected.

To switch to the USB1 and USB2,

touch [Source] on the audio screen.

“Selecting audio source”

(page 3-14)

Album artwork/Turn direction indica-

tor:

Image of an album artwork is dis-

3. Audio system

3-25

3. Audio system

played when available if the setting is

turned on.

“USB Menu” (page 3-27)

When the album artwork display

setting is turned off, the turn direction

and the distance to the next turn are

displayed when a route is set with the

navigation system.

Play time and progress bar:

The play time of the track is displayed.

The bar indicates the progress in

playing a track.

USB operation keys:

Touch an icon for operations.

[ ] Each time [ ] is touched, the

repeat mode changes.

“Changing play mode”

(page 3-27)

[] Touch to return to the begin-

ning of the current track.

Touch again to select the pre-

vious track. Touch and hold to

rewind the current track.

[] Touch to play the track.

[] Touch to pause the track.

[] Touch to select the next track.

Touch and hold to fast-forward

the track.

[] Each time [ ] is touched, the

random mode changes.

“Changing play mode”

(page 3-27)

Track and folder number:

Indicates the track number and the

folder number.

Data type indicator:

Indicates the type of data currently

playing.

USB memory device player op-

eration

Activation and playing:

Connecting the USB memory device into

the port will activate the USB mode.

USB memory device can also be played by

selecting the source on the audio source

menu screen.

“Selecting audio source” (page 3-14)

To pause playing the USB memory device,

touch [ ]. To resume playing, touch

[].

Skipping tracks:

To skip the tracks, push <>/< >,

touch [ ]/[ ] on the screen, or tilt up/

down <>/< > on the steering wheel

repeatedly until preferred track is se-

lected.

INFO:

Depending on the condition, skipping to

the previous track may require pushing

the button or touching the key twice.

Pushing the button or touching the key

once may only restart the current track

from the beginning.

3-26

Changing folders:

To change folders, touch [USB Menu] and

touch [Folder List].

“USB Menu” (page 3-27)

For U.S. and Canada

Turn <TUNE·SCROLL/SOUND> to skip to

different folders. If no folders are found,

tracks will be skipped.

Fast-forwarding/rewinding:

To rewind or fast-forward the track, push

and hold <>/< >, touch and hold

[]/[ ], or tilt and hold < >/< >

on the steering wheel.

Changing play mode:

Repeat mode

Touch [ ] on the screen to change the

repeat mode as follows.

[All] ?[1 Track] ?[1 Folder] ?[All]

Random mode

Touch [ ] on the screen to change the

random mode as follows.

(off) ?[1 Folder] ?[All] ?(off)

USB Menu

Touch [USB Menu] on the USB screen to

display the USB Menu screen.

The following items are available.

[Now Play-

ing]

Touch to display the USB

screen.

[SCAN] Touch to scan the tracks in

the USB memory device.

During scanning, the first

several seconds of all the

tracks will be played. Touch-

ing [SCAN] again will cancel

the scanning mode and the

USB memory device will re-

turn to play normally from

the track which is playing.

[Folder List]

Touch to display the folder

list. Touch an item on the list

to select the folder.

Touch [ ] and go back to

the previous screen to select

tracks in the folder.

[Album Art-

work]

Touch to turn on/off the

album artwork display on the

USB screen.

Track List A list of the tracks in the USB

is displayed. Touch an item

on the list to select the track.

*: Displayed only when available.

3. Audio system

3-27

3. Audio system

iPod PLAYER

Connecting iPod

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

.Do not force the USB device into

the USB connection port. Inserting

the USB device tilted or up-side-

down into the port may damage

the port. Make sure that the USB

device is connected correctly into

the USB connection port.

.Do not grab the USB connection

port cover (if so equipped) when

pulling the USB device out of the

port. This could damage the port

and the cover.

.Do not leave the USB cable in a

place where it can be pulled unin-

tentionally. Pulling the cable may

damage the port.

Connect the iPod to the USB connection

port(s).

“USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connec-

tion Port and AUX (auxiliary) input

jack” (page 2-12)

The battery of the iPod will be charged

while the device is connected to the

vehicle if the iPod supports charging via

a USB connection.

Depending on the device and firmware

version of the iPod, the display on the iPod

shows a NISSAN or Accessory Attached

screen when the connection is completed.

When the iPod is connected to the vehicle,

the iPod music library can only be oper-

ated by the vehicle audio controls.

Compatibility:

Made for

.iPod (5th generation)

.iPod touch (4th generation)

.iPod touch (3rd generation)

.iPod touch (2nd generation)

.iPod touch (1st generation)

.iPod touch

.iPod classic (80G/160GB)

.iPod classic (120GB)

.iPod nano (7th generation)

.iPod nano (6th generation)

.iPod nano (5th generation)

.iPod nano (4th generation)

.iPod nano (3rd generation)

.iPod nano (2nd generation)

.iPod nano (1st generation)

.iPhone 6s Plus

.iPhone 6s

.iPhone 6 Plus

.iPhone 6

.iPhone 5s

.iPhone 5c

.iPhone 5

.iPhone 4s

.iPhone 4

.iPhone 3GS

.iPhone 3G

.iPhone

3-28

INFO:

.Make sure that the iPod firmware is

updated.

.The Lightning

connector works with

iPhone 5, iPod touch (5th generation),

and iPod nano (7th generation).

The 30-pin connector works with

iPhone 4s, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS,

iPhone 3G, iPhone, iPod touch (1st

through 4th generation), iPod classic

and iPod nano (1st through 6th gen-

eration).

USB works with iPhone 5, iPhone 4s,

iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G,

iPhone, iPod touch (1st through 5th

generation) iPod classic and iPod nano

(1st through 7th generation).

.Refer to your device manufacturer’s

owner information regarding the

proper use and care of the device.

How to view iPod screen

3. Audio system

3-29

3. Audio system

[iPod Menu]:

Touch to display the iPod Menu

screen.

“iPod Menu” (page 3-31)

[Source]:

Touch to switch to the source list

screen.

“Selecting audio source”

(page 3-14)

Track information:

Track information such as the song

title, artist name and album name are

displayed.

Audio source indicator:

Models with one USB connection port:

Indicates that an iPod device is cur-

rently selected among other sources.

Models with two USB connection

ports:

Indicates which iPod memory device

(iPod1 or iPod2) is currently selected.

To switch to the iPod1 and iPod2,

touch [Source] on the audio screen.

“Selecting audio source”

(page 3-14)

Album artwork/Turn direction indica-

tor:

Image of an album artwork is dis-

played when available if the setting is

turned on.

“iPod Menu” (page 3-31)

When the album artwork display

setting is turned off, the turn direction

and the distance to the next turn are

displayed when a route is set with the

navigation system.

Play time and progress bar:

The play time of the track is displayed.

The progress bar indicates the pro-

gress in playing the current track.

iPod operation keys:

Touch an icon for operations.

[ ] Each time [ ] is touched, the

mode changes.

“Changing play mode”

(page 3-31)

[] Touch to return to the begin-

ning of the current track. Touch

again to select the previous

track. Touch and hold to re-

wind the current track.

[] Touch to play the track.

[] Touch to pause the track.

[] Touch to select the next track.

Touch and hold to fast-forward

the track.

[] Each time [ ] is touched, the

mode changes.

“Changing play mode”

(page 3-31)

Track number:

Indicates the track number and the

total number of tracks.

iPod player operation

Activation and playing:

Connecting iPod to the vehicle via USB

cable will activate the iPod mode.

The iPod can also be played by selecting

the source on the audio source menu

screen.

3-30

“Selecting audio source” (page 3-14)

Selecting search method:

A list of search methods is displayed in the

iPod menu.

Touch [iPod Menu] to display the iPod

menu. Touch and select an item to play

the iPod in your preferred settings.

Skipping tracks:

To skip the tracks, push <>/< >,

touch [ ]/[ ] on the screen, or tilt up/

down <>/< > on the steering wheel

repeatedly until preferred track is se-

lected.

INFO:

Depending on the condition, skipping to

the previous track may require pushing

the button or touching the key twice.

Pushing the button or touching the key

once may only restart the current track

from the beginning.

For U.S. and Canada

Turning <TUNE·SCROLL/SOUND> while a

track is playing will also skip the tracks.

Skipping items:

Touch [iPod Menu] to display the item list.

Turn <TUNE·SCROLL/SOUND> (for U.S.

and Canada) or </SOUND> (for

Mexico) to skip to different items on the

list.

Fast-forwarding/rewinding:

To fast-forward or rewind the track, push

and hold <>/< >, touch and hold

[]/[ ], or tilt and hold < >/< >

on the steering wheel.

Changing play mode:

Repeat mode

Touch [ ] on the screen to change the

repeat mode as follows.

(off) ?[One] ?[All] ?(off)

Random mode

Touch [ ] on the screen to change the

random mode as follows.

(off) ?[Songs] ?[Albums] ?(off)

iPod Menu

Touch [iPod Menu] on the iPod screen to

display the iPod menu screen.

The following items are available.

[Now

Playing]

Touch to display the iPod

screen.

[Current

List]

Touch to display the menu list

which was displayed most re-

cently.

[Album

Artwork]

Touch to turn on/off the al-

bum artwork display on the

iPod screen.

[Playlists] Touch to display the playlist

and touch an item on the list

to select the playlist.

[Artists] Touch to display the artist list

and touch an item on the list

to select the artist.

[Albums] Touch to display the album list

and touch an item on the list

to select the album.

[Songs] Touch to display the song list

and touch an item on the list

to select the song.

[Podcasts] Touch to display the podcast

list and touch an item on the

list to select the podcast.

[Genres] Touch to display the genre list

and touch an item on the list

to select the genre.

[Compo-

sers]

Touch to display the compo-

ser list and touch an item on

the list to select the composer.

3. Audio system

3-31

3. Audio system

[Audio-

books]

Touch to display the audio-

book list and touch an item on

the list to select the audio-

book.

INFO:

On the list screen, touch and hold [ ]or

[] on the right side of the screen to

jump by letter for faster scrolling.

BLUETOOTH® AUDIO

Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth®

Audio.

If you have a compatible Bluetooth®

device with streaming audio (A2DP pro-

file), you can set up a wireless connection

between your Bluetooth® device and the

in-vehicle audio system. This connection

allows you to listen to the audio from the

Bluetooth® device using your vehicle

speakers. It also may allow basic control

of the device for playing and skipping

audio files using the AVRCP Bluetooth®

profile. Not all Bluetooth® devices have the

same level of controls for AVRCP. Please

consult the manual for your Bluetooth®

device for more details.

Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth®

functions share the same frequency band

(2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth® and the

wireless LAN functions at the same time

may slow down or disconnect the com-

munication and cause undesired noise. It

is recommended that you turn off the

wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Blue-

tooth® functions.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio de-

vice

A Bluetooth® audio device must be con-

nected to the vehicle before operation.

“Connecting Bluetooth® device”

(page 2-26)

3-32

How to view Bluetooth® audio screen [BT Menu]:

Touch to display the Bluetooth® audio

menu screen.

“BT Menu” (page 3-35)

[Source]:

Touch to switch to the source list

screen.

“Selecting audio source”

(page 3-14)

Track information:

Track information such as the song

title, artist name and album name are

displayed.

Audio source indicator:

Indicates that Bluetooth® audio is

currently selected among other

sources.

Turn direction indicator:

When a route to the destination is set,

the turn direction and the distance to

the next turn are displayed.

Play time and Progress bar:

The play time of the track is displayed.

The Progress bar indicates the pro-

gress in playing the current track.

Bluetooth® audio operation keys:

Touch an icon for operations.

3. Audio system

3-33

3. Audio system

[ ] Each time [ ]is

touched, the repeat

mode changes.

“Changing play

mode” (page 3-35)

[] Touch to return to the

beginning of the current

track. Touch again to

select the previous

track. Touch and hold to

rewind the current track.

[/ ] Touch to play and pause

the track.

[] Touch to select the next

track. Touch and hold to

fast-forward the track.

[] Each time [ ]is

touched, the random

mode changes.

“Changing play

mode” (page 3-35)

Track number and device name:

Indicates the track number and the

selected Bluetooth® device name.

INFO:

Depending on the audio device that is

connected to the vehicle, track informa-

tion may not be displayed.

Bluetooth® audio operation

The ability to pause, change tracks, fast

forward, rewind, randomize and repeat

music may be different between devices.

Some or all of these functions may not be

supported on each device.

INFO:

Depending on the Bluetooth® audio de-

vice that is connected, it may not be

possible to perform audio operations or

a time lag may occur before music is

played back.

Activation and playing:

A Bluetooth® audio device can be played

by selecting the source on the audio

source menu screen.

“Selecting audio source” (page 3-14)

To pause playing the Bluetooth® audio,

touch [ / ]. Touch again to resume

playing.

Skipping tracks:

Push <>/< >, touch [ ]/[ ] on the

screen, or tilt up/down <>/< > on

the steering wheel briefly to skip to the

next or the previous track.

INFO:

Depending on the condition, skipping to

the previous track may require pushing

the button or touching the key twice.

Pushing the button or touching the key

once may only restart the current track

from the beginning.

For U.S. and Canada

While a track is playing, turning <TUNE·SC-

ROLL/SOUND> will also skip the tracks.

Changing folders:

To change folders, touch [BT Menu] and

touch [Folder List].

“BT Menu” (page 3-35)

For U.S. and Canada

Turn <TUNE·SCROLL/SOUND> to skip to

different folders. If no folders are found,

tracks will be skipped.

3-34

Fast-forwarding/rewinding:

To fast-forward or rewind the track, push

and hold <>/< >, touch and hold

[]/[ ], or tilt and hold < >/< >

on the steering wheel.

Changing play mode:

Repeat mode

Touch [ ] on the screen to change the

repeat mode.

Random mode

Touch [ ] on the screen to change the

random mode.

INFO:

Available repeat/random modes change

depending on the connected device.

BT Menu

Touch [BT Menu] on the Bluetooth® audio

screen to display the Bluetooth® audio

menu screen.

The following items are available.

[Now Play-

ing]

Touch to display the Blue-

tooth® audio screen.

[Bluetooth

Settings]

Touch to display the Blue-

tooth® settings screen.

“Bluetooth® settings”

(page 2-26)

[Folder List]

Touch to display the folder

list. Touch an item on the list

to select the folder.

Track List A list of the tracks is dis-

played. Touch an item on the

list to select the track.

*: Displayed only when available.

AUXILIARY (AUX) DEVICES

Connecting auxiliary devices

The auxiliary input jack is located in the

media pocket.

“USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connec-

tion Port and AUX (auxiliary) input

jack” (page 2-12)

The auxiliary input jack accepts any stan-

dard analog audio input such as from a

portable cassette player, CD player or MP3

player.

INFO:

Insert a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo mini plug in

the audio input jack. If a cable with a mono

plug is used, the audio output may not

function normally.

AUX operation

Activation and playing:

Turn on an AUX device.

Connect an AUX cable to the AUX device

and the AUX jack. Select AUX mode from

the audio source menu screen.

“Selecting audio source” (page 3-14)

3. Audio system

3-35

3. Audio system

How to view AUX screen

[Source]:

Touch to switch to the source list

screen.

“Selecting audio source”

(page 3-14)

Audio source indicator:

Indicates that an AUX device is cur-

rently selected among other sources.

Turn direction indicator:

When a route to the destination is set,

the turn direction and the distance to

the next turn are displayed.

Volume Setting keys:

Touch one of the keys to select the

sound output gain from [Low], [Med-

ium] and [High].

3-36

AUDIO SETTINGS

Audio settings can be adjusted or audio related functions can be turned on/off with the following procedure.

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Sound].

Setting items Action

[Bass]

Adjust the speaker tone quality and sound balance by touching [+]/[-], [L]/[R] or [R]/[F].

[Treble]

[Balance]

[Fade]

[Speed Sensitive Volume] Automatically adjusts the volume depending on the vehicle speed. Touch [+]/[-] to change

the sensitivity level.

[BOSE® Centerpoint]

(if so equipped)

When this item is turned on, surround sound playback is generated from a traditional

stereo recording. Turn on the item to activate BOSE® Centerpoint and to change its effect

level with [Surround Volume].

[Surround Volume]

(if so equipped)

Touch [+]/[-] to adjust the Surround Volume level if BOSE® Centerpoint [ON].

[Driver’s Audio Stage]

(if so equipped)

When this item is turned on, a better sound will be provided to the driver’s position. The

driver can enjoy a more crisp and clear sound that is specialized for the driver’s seat

position. The prominency of the effect of this feature depends on the type of music that is

played. For some music, it may be difficult to recognize the effect of the feature.

INFO:

The setting items [BOSE® Centerpoint] and [Surround Volume] will be disabled when an analog radio signal is received.

3. Audio system

3-37

3. Audio system

AUDIO ADJUSTMENTS WHEN MAP,

AUDIO OR HOME MENU IS DIS-

PLAYED

For U.S. and Canada

When the Map, Audio or HOME MENU

screen is displayed, some audio settings

can be adjusted with <TUNE·SCROLL/

SOUND>. Each time <TUNE·SCROLL/

SOUND> is pushed, the selected setting

item will change as follows.

[Bass] ?[Treble] ?[Balance] ?[Fade]

Rotate <TUNE·SCROLL/SOUND> to adjust

the level of the selected setting item.

For Mexico

When the Map or Audio screen is dis-

played, some audio settings can be ad-

justed with </SOUND>. Each time

</SOUND> is pushed, the se-

lected setting item will change as follows.

[Bass] ?[Treble] ?[Balance] ?[Fade]

Rotate </SOUND> to adjust the

level of the selected setting item. CD/USB MEMORY DEVICE CARE

AND CLEANING

.Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch

the surface of the disc. Do not bend

the disc.

.Always place the discs in the storage

case when they are not being used.

.To clean a disc, wipe the surface from

the center to the outer edge using a

clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc

using a circular motion.

Do not use a conventional record

3-38

cleaner or alcohol intended for indus-

trial use.

.A new disc may be rough on the inner

and outer edges. Remove the rough

edges by rubbing the inner and outer

edges with the side of a pen or pencil

as illustrated.

USB MEMORY DEVICE

.Never touch the terminal portion of

the USB memory device.

.Do not place heavy objects on the USB

memory device.

.Do not store the USB memory device

in highly humid locations.

.Do not expose the USB memory device

to direct sunlight.

.Do not spill any liquids on the USB

memory device.

Refer to the USB memory device Owner’s

Manual for the details.

3. Audio system

3-39

3. Audio system

MEMO

3-40

4 Hands-Free Phone

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System ....................... 4-2

Indicators...................................................................................... 4-3

Phone .............................................................................................. 4-4

Hands-free text messaging assistant .................... 4-6

Phone and text message assistant

settings ..................................................................................... 4-10

Bluetooth® setting ........................................................... 4-13

4. Hands-Free Phone

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE

PHONE SYSTEM

WARNING

.Use a phone after stopping your

vehicle in a safe location. If you

have to use a phone while driving,

exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

.If you find yourself unable to de-

vote full attention to vehicle op-

eration while talking on the phone,

pull off the road to a safe location

and stop your vehicle before doing

so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery,

use a phone only after starting the

engine or the hybrid system.

Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an

owner of a compatible Bluetooth® en-

abled cellular phone, you can set up the

wireless connection between your cellular

phone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you

can make or receive a telephone call with

your cellular phone in your pocket.

Once a cellular phone is connected to the

in-vehicle phone module, the procedure

for connecting the phone does not need

to be performed again. Your phone is

automatically selected with the in-vehicle

phone module when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position with the se-

lected cellular phone turned on and

carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Blue-

tooth® devices in the in-vehicle phone

module. However, you can talk on only

one cellular phone at a time.

The Voice Recognition system supports

phone commands, so dialing a phone

number using your voice is possible.

“7. Voice recognition”

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System, refer to the following

notes.

.Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Blue-

tooth® functions share the same fre-

quency band (2.4 GHz). Using the

Bluetooth® and the wireless LAN func-

tions at the same time may slow down

or disconnect the communication and

cause undesired noise. It is recom-

mended that you turn off the wireless

LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Bluetooth®

functions.

.Set up the wireless connection be-

tween a compatible cellular phone and

the in-vehicle phone module before

using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System.

.For U.S. and Canada:

Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular

phones may not be recognized by

the in-vehicle phone module. Visit the

website below for a recommended

phone list.

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/

.For Mexico:

Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular

phones may not be recognized by

the in-vehicle phone module. Consult

a NISSAN dealer for details regarding

phone compatibility.

.You will not be able to use a hands-

free phone under the following condi-

tions:

— Your vehicle is outside of the tele-

phone service area.

— Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive radio waves; such

as in a tunnel, in an underground

4-2

parking garage, behind a tall build-

ing or in a mountainous area.

— Your cellular phone is locked in

order to prevent dialing.

.When the radio wave condition is not

ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it

may be difficult to hear the other

person’s voice during a call.

.Immediately after the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position, it may be

impossible to receive a call for a short

period of time.

.Do not place the cellular phone in an

area surrounded by metal or far away

from the in-vehicle phone module to

prevent tone quality degradation and

wireless connection disruption.

.While a cellular phone is connected

through the Bluetooth® wireless con-

nection, the battery power of the

cellular phone may discharge quicker

than usual.

.For U.S. and Canada:

Visit the website below for trouble-

shooting help if the Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System seems to be mal-

functioning.

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/

.For Mexico:

If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System seems to be malfunctioning, it

is recommended you consult a NISSAN

dealer for support.

.Some cellular phones or other devices

may cause interference or a buzzing

noise to come from the audio system

speakers. Storing the device in a dif-

ferent location may reduce or elim-

inate the noise.

.Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual regarding the telephone pair-

ing procedure specific to your phone,

battery charging, cellular phone an-

tenna, etc.

.The antenna display on the monitor

may not coincide with the antenna

display of some cellular phones.

.The battery display on the monitor

may not coincide with the battery

display of some cellular phones.

.Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible to hear the caller’s voice

clearly as well as to minimize its

echoes.

.If reception between callers is unclear,

adjusting the incoming or outgoing

call volume may improve the clarity.

.The microphone is located near the

map light.

.Reduce background noise as much as

possible by closing windows and

pointing HVAC vents away from the

ceiling.

INDICATORS

Indicators for phone and text messa-

ging are displayed on the top of the

screen.

4. Hands-Free Phone

4-3

4. Hands-Free Phone

Indicates the number of unread

received messages.

Indicates the Bluetooth® device

that is selected.

Indicates the strength of the

signal the Bluetooth® device is

receiving.

Indicates the amount of re-

maining Bluetooth® device bat-

tery.

PHONE

Connecting Bluetooth® Hands-

free Phone

A cellular phone device must be con-

nected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System before operation. Up to 5

Bluetooth® devices can be connected to

the system.

“Connecting Bluetooth® device”

(page 2-26)

Phone selection

Select one of the connected devices for

operation.

1. Touch [Phone] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Select BT Device]. A list of the

connected cellular phones is dis-

played.

3. Touch one of the connected cellular

phones from the list.

4. Touch [Connect].

INFO:

Touch [Edit] to change the device

name. Touch [Delete] to delete the

device from the device list.

5. When the device selection is success-

ful, a message on the touch screen

display indicates that the cellular

phone was selected.

INFO:

To select a phone, Bluetooth® of the

phone device needs to be turned on.

Making a call

1. Touch [Phone] on the Launch Bar.

2. Select one of the following methods to

make a call.

[Quick Dial] :

Select a telephone number from a list

of personally selected numbers.

“Quick Dial” (page 4-12)

[Phonebook] :

Select a person and the phone num-

ber you wish to call from the phone-

book.

Depending on the device, the phone-

book will be downloaded from the

cellular phone automatically when it

is connected. If the automatic down-

load does not take place, the tele-

phone number must be transferred to

the hands-free phone system from the

cellular phone prior to using this

method.

4-4

“Phone settings” (page 4-10)

[Call History] :

Select a telephone number from re-

cent incoming, outgoing or missed

calls.

[Dial Number] :

Enter the phone number manually

using the keypad displayed on the

screen and touch [OK].

“How to input letters and num-

bers” (page 2-18)

3. Dialing will start and the screen will

change to the call in progress screen.

Receiving a call

When you receive a phone call, a notifica-

tion message is displayed on the touch

screen display with a ring tone.

Taking a call:

To answer the call, take one of the

following actions.

.Push <>/< > on the steering

wheel.

.Touch [Answer].

Rejecting a call:

To reject the call, touch [Decline].

Holding a call:

To hold the call, touch [Hold Call].

INFO:

Operation for answering and rejecting a

received phone call is also available on the

vehicle information display. Refer to the

vehicle Owner’s Manual for details.

During a call

The screen as illustrated will appear dur-

ing a call.

To hang up the phone, touch [Hang up].

Call from a second person:

When another phone call is received

during a call, the screen as illustrated will

appear.

4. Hands-Free Phone

4-5

4. Hands-Free Phone

Rejecting call from a second person:

To reject a call from the second person

and continue the conversation with the

first caller, touch [Decline].

Answering call from a second person:

To answer the call from the second

person and place the first caller on hold,

take one of the following actions.

.Push <>/< > on the steering

wheel.

.Touch [Answer].

The screen as illustrated will appear dur-

ing a call with a second person.

To hang up the phone and return to the

conversation with the first caller, touch

[Hang up].

To switch between two calls on line, touch

[Switch Call].

Operations during a call:

There are some options available other

than hanging up a call or answering/

rejecting incoming calls.

Touch one of the following displayed keys

on the screen to take action.

Available

item

Action

[Use Handset] Transfer the call to the

cellular phone.

[Mute]/[Can-

cel Mute]

When muted, your voice

will not be heard by the

person on the other end of

the line.

[Dial Number] Using the touch tone, send

digits to the connected

party for using services

such as voicemail.

[Switch Call]* Answer another incoming

call. The person you are

talking to will be placed on

hold. Push once more to

speak to the person on

hold again.

*: Available when a call is received while on

the line with another person. The avail-

ability of this function depends on the

phone device.

INFO:

To adjust the person’s voice to be louder

or quieter, push + or - side of <>on the

steering wheel or turn <VOL/ >or

<VOLUME/ >, while talking on the

phone.

HANDS-FREE TEXT MESSAGING

ASSISTANT

WARNING

.Use the text messaging feature

after parking your vehicle in a safe

location. If you have to use the

feature while driving, exercise ex-

treme caution at all times so full

attention may be given to vehicle

operation.

.Laws in some jurisdictions may

restrict the use of “Text-to-

Speech.” Check local regulations

before using this feature.

.Laws in some jurisdictions may

restrict the use of some of the

applications and features, such as

social networking and texting.

Check local regulations for any

requirements.

4-6

.If you are unable to devote full

attention to vehicle operation

while using the text messaging

feature, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

This feature is disabled if the con-

nected device does not support it. See

the phone’s Owner’s Manual for de-

tails and instructions.

The system allows for the sending and

receiving of text messages through the

vehicle interface.

Receiving a message

When the cellular phone connected to the

vehicle receives a text message, a notifi-

cation will appear on the vehicle informa-

tion display and on the touch screen

display with a tone.

To check the message, touch [Read].

Touch [Ignore] to save the message to

be checked later.

INFO:

.Depending on the phone device, noti-

fication display setting needs to be

turned on on the phone device.

.Operation for reading a new message

is also available on the vehicle infor-

mation display. Refer to the vehicle

Owner’s Manual.

Displaying received message list

1. Touch [Phone] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Text Message].

3. Touch an item on the list to read or

reply to the message.

INFO:

Up to 20 messages can be stored in the

message list.

4. Hands-Free Phone

4-7

4. Hands-Free Phone

Received message screen

Example

Touching [Read] on the new message

notification screen or selecting a message

from the message list will show the details

of the received message on the display.

Available actions:

.[Prev.]:

Touch to read the previous message.

.[Next]:

Touch to read the next message.

.[Play]/[Stop]:

Touch [Play] to have the hands-free

phone system read out the received

message. Touch [Stop] to stop read-

ing.

.[Call]:

If the sender of the message is regis-

tered in the Phonebook, touch this

icon to make a call to the sender.

.[Reply]:

A reply message can be selected from

the template.

“Sending a text message”

(page 4-8)

.[Exit]:

Touch to exit the text messaging

screen.

INFO:

.Available keys may vary depending on

the situations.

.If the sender’s name and phone num-

ber is registered in the Phonebook, the

name of the sender is displayed when

a message is received.

.The volume of the voice for text

message reading can be adjusted.

“Volume and Beeps settings”

(page 2-24)

.Some of the operations are also avail-

able on the vehicle information dis-

play. Refer to the vehicle Owner’s

Manual for details.

Sending a text message

This function may not be supported

depending on the phone device.

1. Touch [Phone] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Text Message].

3. Touch [Create Message].

4-8

The following items are available.

Available item Action

[To]

[Quick Dial] Select a recipient from Quick Dial.

[Phonebook] Select a contact from the Phonebook.

[Call History] Select a contact/phone number from call history.

[Enter Number by Keypad] Enter the phone number of the recipient using the keypad. Touch [OK] to

confirm the address.

[Select Text] [Fixed Text] Touch to display a list of pre-defined text messages.

[Custom Text] Touch to display a list of custom text message templates.

Custom text can be created or edited from the setting menu.

“Phone and text message assistant settings” (page 4-10)

[Send] Touch to send the message.

4. Hands-Free Phone

4-9

4. Hands-Free Phone

PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGE ASSISTANT SETTINGS

Phone settings

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System settings can be changed according to the user’s preference.

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Phone].

The following phone setting items are available.

Setting item Action

[Quick Dial] [Edit] Entries in the Quick Dial can be edited. Touch [Add New] to register

a new entry.

[Delete All] Deletes all of the phone number in the Quick Dial.

[Call History] [Incoming] Items in the calls history can be deleted or be registered in the

Quick Dial.

[Outgoing]

[Missed]

[Phonebook] [Download Entire Phonebook] All of the phone numbers that are stored in a phonebook of a

cellular phone that is connected to the vehicle are downloaded at

once.

[Download 1 Entry] Each of the phone numbers that are stored in the phonebook of a

cellular phone that is connected to the vehicle is downloaded one

by one.

[Downloaded List] The downloaded phonebook data is displayed. The items on the

list can be added to the Quick Dial entries or be deleted from the

phonebook.

4-10

[Text Message] [Text Message] Turns the message function on/off.

[Text Message Ringtone] Turns the incoming message sound on/off.

[Signature] Turns the signature setting for the outgoing text message on/off.

[Auto Reply] Turns the automatic reply of fixed messages on/off.

[Auto Reply Text Message] Selects and sets an automatic reply message.

[Sending Retry Count] Sets the number of retries after failing to send a text message.

[Edit Custom Text] Edits the custom text.

[Volume] [Ringtone] Adjust the volume level of the ringtone by touching [+] or [-].

[Incoming Call] Adjust the incoming call volume by touching [+] or [-].

[Outgoing Call] Adjust the outgoing call volume by touching [+] or [-].

[Automatic Hold] When this function is activated, an incoming phone call will be put

on hold automatically.

[Vehicle Ringtone] When this function is activated, a specific ringtone that is different

from that of the cellular phone will sound when receiving a call.

[Auto Downloaded] Turns the automatic download on/off.

INFO:

The phone volume can also be changed by touching [Phone] on the Launch Bar and then touching [Volume].

4. Hands-Free Phone

4-11

4. Hands-Free Phone

Phonebook

Phonebook information in cellular phones

can be downloaded to be used for making

calls and sending text messages.

“Phone settings” (page 4-10)

Quick Dial

Up to 5 Quick Dial entries can be regis-

tered.

Quick Dial entries can be used to make a

call or to send text messages.

Registration:

1. Touch [Phone] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Quick Dial].

3. Touch [Add New] to register a phone

number to the Quick Dial list.

4. Select a method for registration.

Available methods:

.[Copy from Call History]:

A phone number can be selected

from [Incoming], [Outgoing], or

[Missed] call history lists.

.[Copy from Phonebook]:

A phone number can be selected

from the Phonebook.

.[Enter Number by Keypad]:

A phone number can be entered

manually using keypad.

INFO:

Available methods may vary depend-

ing on conditions.

5. The registration screen is displayed.

Enter the phone number and edit the

entry information as necessary.

6. Touch [OK] to save the entry.

INFO:

Quick Dial entries can also be regis-

tered by touching [Settings] on the

Launch Bar and then selecting

[Phone].

“Phone settings” (page 4-10)

Voice Tag:

A custom voice tag can be recorded for

each of the items registered in the Quick

Dial and be used to dial the number by

speaking it.

On the Quick Dial registration screen,

select [VoiceTag].

4-12

Available

Items

Action

[Play] Play the recorded voice tag.

[Store] Touch to record a voice tag for

the phone number.

[Replace] Touch to rerecord the voice

tag.

[Delete] Touch to delete the voice tag.

BLUETOOTH® SETTING

The Bluetooth® setting can be changed.

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Bluetooth].

Available item Action

[Bluetooth] If this setting is turned off, the connection between the Bluetooth® devices and the in-

vehicle Bluetooth® module will be canceled.

[Connect Device] Connects to the Bluetooth® device. Up to 5 devices can be registered.

[Select BT Device] [Phone] Registered devices are shown on the list. Select a Bluetooth® device from the list.

Information of the selected device can be edited and the device can also be deleted from

the device list.

[Audio Player]

[Edit Bluetooth Informa-

tion]

[OK] Touch to apply the changes after editing the Bluetooth® information.

[PIN] PIN code can be checked and changed.

[Device Name] Device Name can be checked and changed.

[Device Address] Device Address can be checked.

4. Hands-Free Phone

4-13

4. Hands-Free Phone

MEMO

4-14

5 Information

Information menu ........................................................................ 5-2

NissanConnect

Services (if so equipped) ............. 5-7

Subscription to NissanConnect

Services ....... 5-7

Legal disclaimer ...................................................................... 5-7

NissanConnect

Services features ........................ 5-7

NissanConnect

Services Menus ......................... 5-11

Emergency support........................................................... 5-15

NissanConnect

Services settings ...................... 5-17

SiriusXM Travel Link (for U.S. and Canada) ............ 5-18

Viewing SiriusXM Travel Link...................................... 5-18

Apple CarPlay ............................................................................. 5-20

Compatibility ........................................................................ 5-20

Apple CarPlay operation ............................................. 5-21

Apple CarPlay settings ................................................. 5-22

Apple CarPlay system limitations ........................ 5-22

Android Auto ................................................................................ 5-23

Compatibility ........................................................................ 5-23

Initial Android phone settings ................................ 5-24

Android Auto operation .............................................. 5-24

Android Auto settings ................................................... 5-25

Android Auto system limitations .......................... 5-26

5. Information

INFORMATION MENU

The information screen sets or displays various information that is helpful for using the vehicle. Available items include the SiriusXM

Travel Link information (for U.S. and Canada), traffic information (for U.S. and Canada), vehicle information, current location

information, navigation software version, etc.

Touch [Info] on the Launch Bar on the screen to display the Information menu.

Available items may vary depending on models and specifications.

For U.S. and Canada

Menu item Result

[NissanConnect Services] Display the NissanConnect

Service menu screen.

“NissanConnect

Services” (page 5-7)

[SXM Weather] [Current Conditions] Display current weather condition information. Touch [Favorite City] to

see conditions for a favorite location. To change the favorite location,

touch [Change City].

[5-Day Forecast] Touch [Favorite City] to see the 5-day weather forecast for a selected

location. To change the selected location, touch [Change City].

5-2

Menu item Result

[Graphical Map] Display a graphical map of the weather information on the display.

Initially, the system will display all available information. Touch the scale

button to show [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out] for changing the map scale to 320

miles (640 km) U.S., 32 miles (64 km) Middle scale or 5 miles (10 km) Detail

scale. Touch [Radar] to stop displaying the weather radar map. Touch

[Chart] to stop displaying weather surface features and pressure, when

the map scale is U.S. Touch [Storm] to stop displaying Storm information,

when the map scale is U.S. or Middle scale. Touch [Winds] to stop

displaying wind information, when map scale is Detail scale.

[Alert Map] Show Alert Map information on the display. Touch [Legend] to display the

detailed contents of information used for the current warning/advisory

map by type. Touch the scale button to show [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out] for

changing the map scale to 320 miles (640 km) U.S., 32 miles (64 km)

Middle scale or 5 miles (10 km) Detail scale.

[Weather Alert] Turn the weather alert on/off.

[SXM Traffic] [Info on Route] Touch to display traffic information detected on the route to the

destination.

[Nearby Traffic Info] Touch to display traffic information detected near the current vehicle

location.

[SXM Sports] Touch [Yes] to view a list of available sports that can be added or touch

[No] to go back. Select a favorite sport and division/conference from the

list to view scores. A favorite team cannot be selected. When viewing a

favorite, a list of recent and near future games/events is displayed. Touch

[Tune] to go to a channel that is broadcasting the event live. A score will

also display while the event is broadcasting. Touch [Delete One] to delete

a favorite sport or [Delete All] to delete all favorite sports. Up to 10 sports

can be saved.

5. Information

5-3

5. Information

Menu item Result

[SXM Stocks] To add a favorite stock, touch [Yes] to display a List of Matching Stocks.

Select a stock by performing a search or typing in the symbol. Touch [Yes]

to add a stock to the list or touch [No] to go back. Touching [Add Stock]

will also allow adding a favorite stock. Once a stock is added, it’s price,

trend, and date can be viewed. Red indicates the stock is down and green

indicates the stock is up. Touch [Delete Stock] to [Delete All] or [Delete

One]. Up to 20 stocks can be saved. Only supported stocks can be added.

[SXM Fuel Prices] [Select Fuel] Select a gas station from the list to see all of the fuel prices or to set it as a

destination.

Touch [Select Fuel] to display prices for a different fuel type.

Touch [By Distance]/[By Price] to sort the list by distance or by price.

Touch [Near Dest]/[Nearby] to show a list of gas stations near the

destination or near the current location.

[By Distance]/[By Price]

[Near Dest]/[Nearby]

[SXM Movie Listings] [Nearby Theaters] Displays a list of theaters by distance. Select the theater for Theater

Details such as its location and phone number. While viewing the Theater

Details, touch [Go here] for route guidance. While viewing the list of

Nearby Theaters, touch [Movies] to display a list of movies that are

playing at that theater. Select the movie to display Movie Details including

the rating, running time, and show times.

[Current Movies] Displays a list of movies that are currently playing. Touch [Details] to

display Movie Details including the rating, running time, and show times.

While viewing the list of Current Movies, select the movie to display a list

of Nearby Theaters. Select the theater for Theater Details such as its

location and phone number. Touch [Movies] for a detailed description

and show times of the selected movie. Touch [Go Here] for route

guidance to the selected theater.

[Vehicle] [Energy Flow] (model with hy-

brid system)

Displays energy information. Touch [History] to display the Fuel Economy

History screen.

For details of the Energy Flow, refer to the vehicle Owner’s Manual.

[Eco Drive Report] Displays the Eco Drive Report.

5-4

Menu item Result

[Where am I?] The name and distance of the next/previous street, and other informa-

tion that indicates the current vehicle location are displayed. GPS

coordinates and altitude are shown on the bottom right.

[SXM Weather Alerts] Display the list of weather alerts.

Touch [Nearby Current] to display nearby current alerts, touch [Nearby

Destination] to display nearby destination alerts.

[Navigation Version] Displays the information of the current map version, program version,

unit code, etc.

[GPS Position] Displays GPS information, such as number of satellites, latitude/long-

itude, and approximate altitude.

[Apple CarPlay] Displays the Apple CarPlay screen.

“Apple CarPlay ” (page 5-20)

[Nissan’s Help for Apple CarPlay] Displays tips for Apple CarPlay operation.

“Apple CarPlay ” (page 5-20)

[Android Auto] Displays the Android Auto screen.

“Android Auto” (page 5-23)

[Nissan’s Help for Android Auto] Displays tips for Android Auto operation.

“Android Auto” (page 5-23)

INFO:

A SiriusXM Travel Link or SiriusXM Traffic subscription is necessary to receive SiriusXM information services.

5. Information

5-5

5. Information

For Mexico

Menu item Result

[Where am I?] The name and distance of the next/previous street, and other information

that indicates the current vehicle location are displayed. GPS coordinates

and altitude are shown on the bottom right.

[Navigation Version] Displays the information of the current map version, program version, unit

code, etc.

[GPS Position] Displays GPS information, such as number of satellites, latitude/longitude,

and approximate altitude.

[Apple CarPlay] Displays the Apple CarPlay screen.

“Apple CarPlay ” (page 5-20)

[Nissan’s Help for Apple CarPlay] Displays tips for Apple CarPlay operation.

“Apple CarPlay ” (page 5-20)

[Android Auto] Displays the Android Auto screen.

“Android Auto” (page 5-23)

[Nissan’s Help for Android Auto] Displays tips for Android Auto operation.

“Android Auto” (page 5-23)

5-6

NISSANCONNECT

SERVICES

(if so equipped)

SUBSCRIPTION TO NISSANCON-

NECT

SERVICES

Except for services received under De-

monstration Mode, it is necessary to

subscribe to NissanConnect

Services in

order to use the NissanConnect

Ser-

vices. To activate NissanConnect

Ser-

vices, you can enroll via the

NissanConnect

Services Companion

App, NissanConnect

portal website, or

it is recommended you contact a NISSAN

dealer.

NissanConnect

Services are offered by

SiriusXM or other third party vendors in

accordance with the terms and condi-

tions and privacy policies outlined in a

Subscription Agreement.

LEGAL DISCLAIMER

Avoid operating NissanConnect

Ser-

vices in such a way that you are distracted

while driving. Except for services provided

under Demonstration Mode, a NissanCon-

nect

Services Subscription Agreement

is required to use this service.

Beginning on the date of purchase of your

vehicle, a trial period for the services is

included for a limited period of time. At the

expiration of the trial subscription period,

your credit card will be charged if there is

a credit card on file, and your service will

automatically renew in accordance with

the terms of your NissanConnect

Ser-

vices Subscription Agreement.

Services are dependent upon subscription

enrollment and the telematics device

being in operative condition, cellular con-

nection availability, navigation map data,

and GPS satellite signal reception, which

can limit the ability to reach NissanCon-

nect

Services or to receive support. The

service requires a compatible GSM/GPRS

cellular network. Should the cellular pro-

vider terminate or restrict network ser-

vice, services will not be available. Under

this circumstance, your service may be

suspended or terminated without notice

and without liability to NISSAN, NISSAN’s

third party service providers, the under-

lying wireless carrier or any third party

beneficiary. In the event that a change of

telecommunications systems or services

becomes necessary, you are solely re-

sponsible for replacing, as well as the cost

of replacing, any equipment in the vehicle

that is necessitated. Terms and conditions

of NissanConnect

Services Subscription

Agreement apply.

NISSANCONNECT

SERVICES

FEATURES

NissanConnect

Services provides var-

ious types of information and services by

connecting your vehicle to the Nissan-

Connect

Services Data Center and Nis-

sanConnect

Services Response Center

using the TCU (Telematics Control Unit)

installed in your vehicle.

WARNING

.Radio waves could adversely af-

fect electric medical equipment.

Individuals who use a pacemaker

should contact the device manu-

facturer regarding any possible

effects before using the system.

.The TCU antenna is installed inside

the upper central part of the in-

strument panel. An occupant

should not get any closer to the

antenna than specified by the

pacemaker manufacturer. The

radio waves from the TCU antenna

may adversely affect the opera-

tion of the pacemaker while using

the NissanConnect

Services.

.Please note that the Automatic

Collision Notification (ACN) service

and Emergency Calling (E-Call)

5. Information

5-7

5. Information

function cannot be used in the

following conditions:

— The vehicle moves outside the

NissanConnect

Services area

and connection with the TCU

(Telematics Control Unit) is af-

fected.

— The vehicle is in a location with

poor signal reception such as a

tunnel, underground parking,

behind a building or in a moun-

tainous area.

.It may not be possible to make an

emergency call depending on the

severity of a collision and/or emer-

gency.

.Emergency functions and services

will not be available without a paid

subscription to NissanConnect

Services.

.The Automatic Collision Notifica-

tion (ACN) service may not function

properly depending on the sever-

ity of a collision and/or emer-

gency.

INFO:

.NissanConnect

Services features

are dependent upon subscription en-

rollment and the telematics device

being in operative condition, cellular

connectivity, navigation map data and

GPS satellite signal reception. Terms

and conditions of the NissanCon-

nect

Services Subscription Agree-

ment apply.

.Enrollment is required in order to

receive NissanConnect

Services.

The services that can be received vary

depending on the plan in which you

are enrolled.

.A trial period is included beginning on

the date of purchase, however you

must still be enrolled and activated to

use services.

.After the trial period, you must enroll in

a paid subscription for NissanCon-

nect

Services to continue using the

features. The services that can be

received vary depending on the plan

to which you subscribe.

.Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict

the use of “Text-to-Speech.” Check

local regulations before using this

feature.

NissanConnect

Services may be up-

dated. The latest detailed information is

available on the following websites or

from the support line.

NissanConnect

Services website:

For U.S.

www.nissanusa.com/connect

For Canada

www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect

(English)

www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect/fr

(French)

NissanConnect

Services support

line:

1-855-426-6628

.Roadside Assistance Service:

Enhanced Roadside Assistance allows

you to receive assistance from the

Roadside Response Specialist for a

non-emergency incident that requires

a towing or third-party response ser-

vice. The service is accessed by touch-

ing the Voice Menu button on the

navigation screen. Roadside Assis-

tance may also be used in conjunction

with the Emergency Assistance ser-

vice, if warranted.

“Emergency support” (page 5-15)

5-8

.Emergency Calling (E-Call):

The Emergency Calling (E-Call) feature

provides emergency assistance by

connecting to a Response Specialist.

In the event of an emergency, by push

the in-vehicle <SOS> button to use this

feature. The Response Specialist pro-

vides various assistance depending on

the situation.

“Emergency support” (page 5-15)

.Automatic Collision Notification

(ACN):

The TCU (Telematics Control Unit)

generates a signal automatically to

the NissanConnect

Services Re-

sponse Center in the case of an

accident severe enough to trigger

one of the vehicle’s air bags. Upon

the signal, a Response Specialist re-

ceives the vehicle location and custo-

mer information and notifies the

proper authorities in accordance with

established policies and procedures.

.Curfew Alert:

Customers can set time interval for

acceptable and unacceptable opera-

tion of the vehicle via NissanCon-

nect

Portal Website and

NissanConnect

Services Companion

App. If the time restrictions are vio-

lated, the customer will be automati-

cally notified (e-mail, text message, or

phone call).

.Remote Door Lock/Unlock:

The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature

allows the customer to access the

vehicle remotely from the NissanCon-

nect

Services website or Companion

App to send lock or unlock commands

to the vehicle.

“Connecting to Interactive Voice

Menu” (page 5-12)

.Remote Sound Horn and Flash

Lights:

Customers can activate the vehicle’s

headlights and horn via the Nissan-

Connect

Services website or Com-

panion App.

.Remote Engine Start (if so equipped):

Customers can remotely start the

vehicle via the NissanConnect

Ser-

vices website or Companion App.

.Alarm Notification:

Customers will be notified if the vehicle

alarm system is activated based on

their notification preferences (e-mail,

text, phone call).

.Boundary Alert:

Customers can set an area for the

vehicle to stay in or out of via the

NissanConnect

Services website or

Companion App. Customers will be

notified when vehicle is out-of-bounds

based on their notification prefer-

ences (e-mail, text, phone call).

.Maintenance Alert/Reminder:

The center sends maintenance and

other relevant info. to registered e-

mail address (PC/Mobile) based on the

vehicle information (e.g. driving mile-

age and etc.) sent at the center access

timing. Details of vehicle information

are separately examined.

.Send to Car:

Customers can access turn-by-turn

navigation provided by Google maps

and sent directly to the NissanCon-

nect

vehicle.

.Journey Planner:

Customers can create a multiple way-

point route via Journey Planner on the

NissanConnect

Services website

and send the details directly to their

vehicle.

.Destination Download:

Customers can search for different

locations via the NissanConnect

Services website and send them di-

rectly to their vehicle.

5. Information

5-9

5. Information

.Connected Search:

Customers can access Internet search

engines directly from the vehicle to

find exact destinations to navigate to.

.Stolen Vehicle Locator:

In the event that the customer’s vehi-

cle is stolen, after filing a police report

the customer can contact NissanCon-

nect

Services via phone and report

the vehicle stolen. At that point, Nis-

sanConnect

Services emergency

support staff will work with authorities

to attempt to recover the vehicle.

.Valet Alert:

Customers will be notified if their

vehicle is driven more than 0.2 miles

once they activate Valet Alert via the

NissanConnect

Services website or

Companion App.

Notice to Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone users

The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem will be disabled and not be able to

take phone calls while the vehicle is

connected to the NissanConnect

Ser-

vices Response Specialists or the emer-

gency support staff at the

NissanConnect

Service Response Cen-

ter. This is to avoid various services by

NissanConnect

Services Response Spe-

cialists (such as Assisted Search) and

NissanConnect

Services emergency

support staff being interrupted by incom-

ing calls. Incoming phone calls received

while the vehicle is connected to the

Service Center will not be listed in the call

history of the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System. However those incoming

calls may be listed in the call history of

your mobile phone, depending on its

capabilities. After disconnecting commu-

nication with the NissanConnect

Ser-

vices Response Specialist or

NissanConnect

Services emergency

support staff, check the incoming call

history on your mobile phone when it is

safe to do so.

Service application

A separately purchased NissanConnect

Services subscription is required. For more

details, refer to the NissanConnect

Ser-

vices website or contact the NissanCon-

nect

Services support line.

NissanConnect

Services website:

For U.S.

www.nissanusa.com/connect

For Canada

www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect

(English)

www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect/fr

(French)

NissanConnect

Services support

line:

1-855-426-6628

INFO:

If the vehicle is owned by another person

and is resold, the subscription for this

service must be canceled and all data

stored on the device must be deleted.

Operating tips

WARNING

.Use NissanConnect

Services

after stopping your vehicle in a

safe location. If you have to use

NissanConnect

Services while

driving, exercise extreme caution

at all times so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

.If you are unable to devote full

attention to vehicle operation

while talking with the NissanCon-

nect

Services, pull off the road to

a safe location and stop your

vehicle.

5-10

.Do not use NissanConnect

Services

with the engine or the hybrid system

stopped. Doing so may discharge the

vehicle battery.

.NissanConnect

Services cannot be

used under the following conditions:

— NissanConnect

Services subscrip-

tion has expired.

— The vehicle is outside the area

where the cellular network service

is receivable.

— The vehicle is in a location with poor

signal reception such as tunnels,

underground parking garages, be-

hind buildings or in mountainous

areas.

— The line is busy.

— The TCU (Telematics Control Unit) or

other systems of your vehicle are

not working properly.

— The NissanConnect

Services net-

work system is disabled.

.Information Feeds download cannot

be used when the vehicle is connected

to the NissanConnect

Services Data

Center and NissanConnect

Services

Response Center.

.Communication with the NissanCon-

nect

Services Data Center is related

to the data communication mode and

may cause occasional difficulty in

receiving signals, and the signal recei-

vable area may be limited compared

to regular mobile phones.

.You may hear clicks or experience

interruptions while speaking with the

NissanConnect

Services Response

Specialists. This is due to a shift in the

connection zone and is not a malfunc-

tion.

.Depending on the line used, the sound

volume may decrease. Adjust the vo-

lume as necessary.

.Received sounds may be distorted or

ambient noise may sound like voices

of a crowd. This is due to the use of the

digital line and is not a malfunction.

.You may hear your own voice from the

speaker when talking with the Nissan-

Connect

Services Response Specia-

lists due to a network disturbance.

When this occurs, reconnect the line

after a few minutes or at a different

location.

.This vehicle incorporates a communi-

cation device that is called a TCU

(Telematics Control Unit). The commu-

nication connection between this unit

and the NissanConnect

Data Center

allows for various services. When the

system connects to the NissanCon-

nect

Data Center, an antenna icon

will appear in the upper right corner of

the screen. Use the service in a loca-

tion where the symbol representing

good signal reception appears on the

screen.

: When the signal reception is good

: When the signal reception is bad

.NissanConnect

Services uses the

TCU (Telematics Control Unit). Even if

the signal strength bar of the in-

vehicle data communication module

indicates good reception, connection

to the NissanConnect

Data Center

may be disabled. This does not indi-

cate a malfunction. Operate the sys-

tem again after a few minutes.

NISSANCONNECT

SERVICES

MENUS

With the NissanConnect

Services, var-

ious information can be received and

displayed on the screen. The information

can also be announced by the system.

1. Touch [Info] on the Launch Bar.

5. Information

5-11

5. Information

2. Touch [NissanConnect Services].

3. Select an item from the NissanCon-

nect

Services menu screens.

Available items Content

[Connect to Voice

Menu]

The system con-

nects to the Nissan-

Connect

Services

center. Various ser-

vices to support

your driving are

available by an-

swering Interactive

Voice Menu.

“Connecting to

Interactive

Voice Menu”

(page 5-12)

[Connected Search] Searches for a des-

tination via the In-

ternet and

commands the na-

vigation system to

set a route to the

destination.

“Searching by

connecting to

the internet”

(page 6-22)

[Message Box] The messages from

the NissanCon-

nect

Data Center

that were referred

to previously are

displayed.

“Message Box”

(page 5-13)

[All Information

Feeds]

Displays a list of

available informa-

tion feeds.

“Viewing infor-

mation feeds”

(page 5-14)

[NissanConnect Ser-

vices Settings]

NissanConnect

Services settings

can be changed.

“NissanConne-

Services

settings”

(page 5-17)

Connecting to Interactive Voice

Various services to support your driving

are available by using Interactive Voice

Menu. For more details, refer to the

NissanConnect

Services website or

contact the NissanConnect

Services

support line.

NissanConnect

Services website:

For U.S.

www.nissanusa.com/connect

For Canada

www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect

(English)

www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect/fr

5-12

(French)

NissanConnect

Services support

line:

1-855-426-6628

1. Touch [Info] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [NissanConnect Services].

3. Touch [Connect to Voice Menu].

4. The system connects to the Nissan-

Connect

Services center and menu

options will be announced. Speak your

preferred option.

.Destination Assistance

Set a destination using an Interac-

tive operator system.

.Roadside Assistance

Connect to the Roadside Response

Specialist.

.Valet Alert

Turns on the Valet Alert function

and monitors the vehicle move-

ment within a certain range.

.Personal Assistance

Connects to the NissanConnect

Services Response Specialist.

INFO:

.You can also connect to the Nissan-

Connect

Services Interactive Voice

Menu by touching the Voice Menu

button on the map.

.After selecting [Connect to Voice

Menu], it may take some time until

the system initiates connection, de-

pending on the technical environment

and whether the TCU (Telematics

Control Unit) is being used by other

services.

.To avoid disconnecting the line, do not

turn off the engine or the hybrid

system.

Setting route to a searched des-

tination

Use Connected Search to find destina-

tions via the internet and set a route to

them directly from your navigation sys-

tem.

1. Touch [Info] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [NissanConnect Services].

3. Touch [Connected Search]. A key-

board is displayed.

4. Enter the keyword and touch [Search].

The system will connect to the Inter-

net and the search results will be

displayed.

5. Touch a preferred destination from

the list and touch [Start] to start the

route guidance.

INFO:

The Connected Search can also be set by

touching [Navi] on the Launch Bar and

then touching [Connected Search].

Message Box

The text messages from the NissanCon-

nect

Data Center that were previously

received to are displayed.

5. Information

5-13

5. Information

1. Touch [Info] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [NissanConnect Services].

3. Touch [Message Box].

4. A history list is displayed. Highlight the

information.

Viewing information feeds

Contents of the various NissanConnect

Services information can be downloaded.

1. Touch [Info] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [NissanConnect Services].

3. Touch [All Information Feeds]. A list

screen is displayed.

4. Touch a preferred folder. A list of

information feeds is displayed. The

content is announced by the system

(Text-to-Speech) while the vehicle is

being driven, or if parked, you can read

the content on the display.

INFO:

.Touch [Stop] during communication

with the NissanConnect

Services

Data Center to cancel the connection.

.A message is displayed when the

communication is disconnected while

downloading information due to a

poor communication status. Select

[Yes] to restart the download.

.Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict

the use of “Text-to-Speech.” Check

local regulations before using this

feature.

.Some terminology such as personal

names, place names, special terms,

symbols, etc. may not be announced

correctly. This is not a malfunction.

.The system will pause announce-

ments when interrupted by the voice

guidance given by the navigation sys-

tem. When the voice guidance finishes,

the system will restart the announce-

ment.

.The volume can be adjusted when the

system announces the information.

“Volume and Beeps settings”

(page 2-24)

.The selected content is read out while

the vehicle is being driven, or if parked,

you can read the content on the

display.

.Content settings can be made using

the NissanConnect

Services web-

site. For more details, refer to the

NissanConnect

Services website or

contact the NissanConnect

Services

support line.

NissanConnect

Services website:

For U.S.

www.nissanusa.com/connect

For Canada

www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect

(English)

www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect/fr

(French)

NissanConnect

Services support

line:

1-855-426-6628

Screen information

When information is downloaded from the

NissanConnect

Services Data Center,

the contents of the information are dis-

played while the vehicle is stopped.

Contents:

The contents of the NissanConnect

Services feeds are displayed.

Menu:

Stops the Text-to-Speech voice an-

5-14

nouncements and displays the opera-

tion menu items on the right side of

the screen.

[ ]/[ ]:

Turns to the next or previous page if

the information has a number of

content pages.

If the information contains map in-

formation, the icon be displayed. It

can be set as the destination.

If the information contains phone

number information, the icon is dis-

played. It is possible to make a phone

call to the facility.

After parking the vehicle in a safe location

and touching [Menu], the operation menu

is displayed on the right side of the screen.

INFO:

The availability of the operation menu

items differs depending on the contents

of the selected information.

EMERGENCY SUPPORT

NissanConnect

Services provides var-

ious services to support dealing with

emergencies of the subscribed vehicle

and the driver.

For example, in case of an illness or

serious injury, you can seek support by

pushing the in-vehicle <SOS> button and

connecting to NissanConnect

Services.

NissanConnect

Services can specify the

location of the vehicle via GPS, and the

information will be sent to the police or

other agencies as needed.

For information about other NissanCon-

nect

Services emergency support re-

lated services, refer to the

NissanConnect

Services Services web-

site or contact the NissanConnect

Ser-

vices support line.

NissanConnect

Services website:

For U.S.

www.nissanusa.com/connect

For Canada

www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect

(English)

www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect/fr

(French)

NissanConnect

Services support

line:

1-855-426-6628

WARNING

.Please note that the Automatic

Collision Notification service and

Emergency Call function cannot be

used in the following conditions:

— Emergency functions and ser-

vices will not be available with-

out a paid subscription to

NissanConnect

Services.

— The NissanConnect

Services

network system is disabled.

— The vehicle moves outside the

service area where the TCU

(Telematics Control Unit) is con-

nected to the system.

— The vehicle is outside the area

where the cellular network ser-

vice is receivable.

— The vehicle is in a location with

poor signal reception such as

tunnels, underground parking

5. Information

5-15

5. Information

garages, behind buildings or in

mountainous areas.

— The line is busy.

— The TCU (Telematics Control

Unit) or other systems of your

vehicle are not working properly.

— It may not be possible to make

an emergency call depending on

the severity of a collision and/or

emergency.

.Park the vehicle in a safe location

and set the parking brake before

operating <SOS>.

.Only use this service in case of an

emergency. There may be a pen-

alty for inappropriate use of the

service.

.Radio waves could adversely af-

fect electric medical equipment.

Individuals who use a pacemaker

should contact the device manu-

facturer regarding any possible

effects before using the system.

.The TCU (Telematics Control Unit)

antenna is installed inside the

upper central part of the instru-

ment panel. An occupant should

not get any closer to the antenna

than specified by the pacemaker

manufacturer. The radio waves

from the TCU antenna may ad-

versely affect the operation of the

pacemaker while using the Nis-

sanConnect

Services.

Making an emergency call

1. Push <SOS>.

2. When the line is connected, speak to

the Response Specialist.

If you want to cancel the emergency call,

push and hold <SOS> for a few seconds.

INFO:

.After <SOS> is pushed, it may take

some time until the system initiates

connection, depending on the techni-

cal environment and whether the TCU

(Telematics Control Unit) is being used

by other services.

.An indicator light on <SOS> shows the

readiness of the emergency support

system. If the indicator light is not

illuminated, pushing <SOS> does not

connect your vehicle to the Response

Specialist.

The indicator light blinks while con-

nected to the NissanConnect

Ser-

vices Response Center.

.Even when the indicator light is illumi-

nated, connection to the NissanCon-

nect

Services Response Center may

not be possible. If this occurs in an

emergency situation, contact the

authorities by other means.

.To avoid disconnecting the line, do not

turn off the engine or the hybrid

system.

5-16

NISSANCONNECT

SERVICES SETTINGS

The NissanConnect

Services setting can be changed.

1. Touch [Info] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [NissanConnect Services].

3. Touch [NissanConnect Services Settings].

INFO:

[NissanConnect Services] can also be accessed from [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

Menu Action

[Information Feed Setting] [Edit Feed List] [Sync All Feeds] The latest information feeds received from the NissanConnect

Services center.

[Initialize Feed List] Return the channel list to default.

[Delete Message Box] Delete all the items in the Message Box.

[Vehicle Information Shar-

ing with Nissan]

[Share Vehicle Information] Turn the vehicle information sharing function on/off.

[Delete Shared Vehicle Information] Delete all the items in the shared vehicle information.

[Unit ID Information] Display the Unit ID, TCU (Telematics Control Unit) ID, SIM ID and VIN

Information necessary for user registration.

[Reset all NissanConnect Services settings to default] All NissanConnect

Services settings are returned to default.

[Vehicle Data Transmission Setting] When [OK] is touched, data transmission to the NissanConnect

Data Center is enabled. Touch [Decline] to disable the Nissan-

Connect

Services functions.

5. Information

5-17

5. Information

SiriusXM TRAVEL LINK (for U.S.

and Canada)

SiriusXM Travel Link information is a sub-

scription service offered by SiriusXM Sa-

tellite Radio. It is necessary to subscribe to

use the SiriusXM Travel Link information.

This service provides real-time informa-

tion regarding current weather, fuel

prices, sports scores, stock tickers and

movie times where available. The SiriusXM

Travel Link is broadcast to the vehicle by

SiriusXM Satellite Radio.

The service enables you to view the

following information on the navigation

system:

*Current information around the destina-

tion

*Detailed information and forecasts of an

area of interest

*Countrywide and local maps with the

current weather, temperature, warnings

and road condition information

*List of warning/watches events detected

around the current location

*Pop-up messages on the navigation

screen with voice announcements when

warnings and watches are detected

around the current location

SXM service menus can be accessed from

the information screen.

“Information menu” (page 5-2)

WARNING

SiriusXM Travel Link information is not

a substitute for attentive driving.

Weather conditions change con-

stantly and emergency situations

can arise without warning. Relying

only on SiriusXM Travel Link informa-

tion could result in serious personal

injury.

VIEWING SiriusXM TRAVEL LINK

SiriusXM Satellite Radio and SiriusXM Tra-

vel Link subscriptions are sold separately

or as a package, and are continuous until

you call SiriusXM to cancel. See SiriusXM

Customer Agreement for complete terms

at www.siriusxm.com (for U.S.) or www.

siriusxm.ca (for Canada). SiriusXM Travel

Link is available in select markets.

For more information, refer to the Sir-

iusXM website or call Listener Care.

SiriusXM website:

For U.S.

www.siriusxm.com/travellink

For Canada

www.siriusxm.ca/siriusxm-traffic-

services/siriusxm-travel-link (English)

www.siriusxm.ca/fr/services-

siriusxm-traffic/siriusxm-travel-link

(French)

Listener Care:

For U.S.

1-877-447-0011

For Canada

1-877-438-9677

INFO:

.If a contract is not completed for the

SiriusXM Travel Link information ser-

vice, a message appears and it will not

be possible to check the information

on the traffic information system.

Example

5-18

.The weather information is available

only for areas that provide weather

information to SiriusXM Travel Link.

.Not all vehicles or devices are capable

of receiving all services offered by

SiriusXM. Data displays and individual

product availability vary by vehicle

hardware. Current information and

features may not be available in all

locations, or on all receivers. SiriusXM

is not responsible for any errors or

inaccuracies in the data services or

their use in the vehicle.

Notes on SiriusXM Traffic infor-

mation

.The SiriusXM Traffic information ser-

vice is not provided for some cities. In

addition, the cities for which the traffic

information service is provided may be

changed.

.In some cases, infrastructure pro-

blems may prevent the complete dis-

play of the traffic information. This is

not a malfunction.

.Due to infrastructure problems, or due

to the time when the traffic informa-

tion service broadcast is received, the

displayed information may differ from

the actual traffic conditions.

.Depending on the traffic information, a

detour route may be slower than the

original route.

.SiriusXM Satellite Radio and SiriusXM

Traffic subscriptions are sold sepa-

rately or as a package, and are con-

tinuous until you call SiriusXM to

cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agree-

ment for complete terms at the Sir-

iusXM website.

SiriusXM website:

For U.S.

www. siriusxm.com

For Canada

www.siriusxm.ca (English)

www.siriusxm.ca/fr (French)

SiriusXM Travel Link is available in

select markets. For more information,

refer to the SiriusXM website or call

Listener Care.

SiriusXM website:

For U.S.

www.siriusxm.com/traffic

For Canada

www.siriusxm.ca/siriusxm-traffic-

services/siriusxm-travel-link (English)

www.siriusxm.ca/fr/services-

siriusxm-traffic/siriusxm-travel-link

(French)

Listener Care:

For U.S.

1-877-447-0011

For Canada

1-877-438-9677

.SiriusXM Traffic is available in over 130

metropolitan markets. For the most

current list of markets covered, please

refer to the SiriusXM website or call

Listener Care.

SiriusXM website:

For U.S.

www.siriusxm.com/siriusxmtraffic

For Canada

www.siriusxm.ca/siriusxm-traffic-

services/siriusxm-traffic (English)

www.siriusxm.ca/fr/services-

siriusxm-traffic/siriusxm-traffic

(French)

Listener Care:

For U.S.

1-877-447-0011

For Canada

1-877-438-9677

5. Information

5-19

5. Information

.Due to road maintenance, infrastruc-

ture problems (e.g. malfunction of

road sensors, outage of central com-

puter of infrastructure) or natural dis-

asters, there are times when some or

all traffic information may not be

available.

.Incident information is based on hu-

man collection. Not all incidents that

have happened are collected and

provided.

.Due to infrastructure problems, or

transmission delay, there are times

when the information may differ from

the actual condition. Always observe

safe driving practices and follow all

traffic regulations.

.Due to the coverage and quality of

traffic information and road condi-

tions, it is not always possible for the

system to provide the shortest time

route even when traffic information is

considered.

.Traffic information that is displayed

may differ from information from

other media (e.g., radio), as other

media may use different information

sources.

Apple CarPlay

WARNING

.Stop your vehicle in a safe location

and apply the parking brake be-

fore connecting your iPhone to the

vehicle or operating your con-

nected iPhone for setup.

.If you are unable to devote full

attention to vehicle operation

while using Apple CarPlay, pull off

the road to a safe location and

stop your vehicle.

You can use Apple CarPlay by connecting

a compatible iPhone to your vehicle via a

USB cable.

With Apple CarPlay, your in-vehicle system

can be used as a display and a controller

for some of the iPhone functions. The

Apple CarPlay features Siri which enables

operations via voice controls. Visit Apple.

com for information about the functions

that are available and details about Ap-

ple’s privacy policy.

Certain vehicle information (e.g. location

and speed) may be shared with your

device while Apple CarPlay is in use.

Carrier charges may apply to use Apple

CarPlay.

COMPATIBILITY

Only iPhone 5 or later models and iOS 8.3

or later versions are compatible with

Apple CarPlay.

Refer to the Apple website for more

information.

INFO:

.For best results, always update your

device to the latest software version.

.Apple CarPlay will take the place of

your Bluetooth® audio and Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone functionality.

5-20

Apple CarPlay OPERATION

1. Connect the iPhone to USB connec-

tion port.

For models with two USB connection

ports, your iPhone must be connected

to USB connection port 1 for Apple

CarPlay operation.

“USB (Universal Serial Bus) Con-

nection Port and AUX (auxiliary)

input jack” (page 2-12)

2. Depending on the setting, a Startup

Information screen will appear. Touch

[Yes] to use Apple CarPlay.

INFO:

If you do not wish to display the

Startup Information screen each time

you activate Apple CarPlay, touch

[Don’t show again] on the Startup

Information screen. The Startup Infor-

mation screen will not be displayed

from the next Apple CarPlay activation.

The Startup Information screen can be

set to appear again in the Apple Car-

Play setting menu.

“Apple CarPlay settings”

(page 5-22)

Example of Apple CarPlay top menu

3. The Apple CarPlay top menu screen

will appear. The iPhone functions dis-

played on the screen should now be

operable using the in-vehicle system.

4. To return to the Apple CarPlay top

menu screen after operation, touch

[] on the lower left corner of the

Apple CarPlay screen.

5. To exit the Apple CarPlay screen and

display the other screens, push

<MENU> or the other buttons on the

control panel and touch the desired

menus.

6. To return to the Apple CarPlay screen,

touch [Info] on the Launch Bar and

then touch [Apple CarPlay]. The Apple

CarPlay screen can also be displayed

by touching [Apple CarPlay] after

touching [MENU] on the Launch Bar

or after pushing <MENU>.

INFO:

When your iPhone is locked with a pass-

code, Apple CarPlay can still be activated

by operating the iPhone and allowing

Apple CarPlay activation when asked.

Siri operation

With Siri, some of the functions in your

iPhone can be voice controlled when

Apple CarPlay is active.

Activation:

There are three ways to start a Siri

session.

.Push and hold <>/< > on the

steering wheel.

.Touch and hold [ ] at the lower left

corner of the Apple CarPlay screen.

.Say “Hey Siri” (requires “Allow

“Hey Siri”

”

activation on the iPhone).

INFO:

.Push <>/< > or touch [ ] to end

Siri operation.

.Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to

eliminate the surrounding noises (traf-

fic noises, vibration sounds, etc.),

which may prevent the system from

5. Information

5-21

5. Information

recognizing the voice commands cor-

rectly.

.For functions that can be used with

Siri, please refer to the Apple website.

.The volume level of Siri can be ad-

justed.

“Volume and Beeps settings”

(page 2-24)

Phone operation (if so equipped)

If you wish to use your phone while Apple

CarPlay is activated, follow the procedure

below:

1. Touch [Phone] on the Launch Bar.

2. Operate the screen displayed to make

a call, etc.

Apple CarPlay SETTINGS

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Apple CarPlay Settings].

Available items:

.[Always Start Apple CarPlay]:

When this item is turned on, Apple

CarPlay will activate automatically

when the iPhone is connected to USB

connection port.

.[Nissan’s Help for Apple CarPlay]:

Displays tips for Apple CarPlay opera-

tion.

.[Show Startup Information]:

Allows you to set whether or not to

show the Apple CarPlay Startup Infor-

mation screen upon each iPhone con-

nection.

Touch [No] if you do not wish to show

the Startup Information screen each

time the iPhone is connected to USB

connection port.

Touch [Yes] to show the Startup In-

formation screen upon each connec-

tion of your iPhone to USB connection

port.

This setting item will be grayed out

until you touch [Don’t show again] on

the Startup Information screen to turn

the setting on.

INFO:

.Models with two USB connection

ports, your iPhone must be connected

to USB connection port 1 for Apple

CarPlay operation.

.[Nissan’s Help for Apple CarPlay] can

also be accessed from the Information

menu.

“Information menu” (page 5-2)

.Phone menu and access to the con-

nected phone through voice recogni-

tion system will be disabled while

Apple CarPlay is connected. To access

your phone, use the Siri function or

select the phone icon in the Apple

CarPlay top menu screen.

.Normal voice recognition access to

songs on your iPod music will not be

available when connected to Apple

CarPlay. To access your iPod music,

use the Siri function or select the

music icon in the Apple CarPlay top

menu screen.

Apple CarPlay SYSTEM LIMITA-

TIONS

For all features of Apple CarPlay to oper-

ate correctly, it is necessary to have a

compatible iPhone, a cellular connection

and a data plan.

When Apple CarPlay is operating, system

performance is affected by the strength of

the cellular connection or performance of

the phone itself. If performance of the

system decreases:

.Disconnect and reconnect your phone

.Close all apps and restart them

.Cycle phone power off/on to restart

It is also recommended to use the Apple

Lightning cable that was provided with

your phone and confirm the latest soft-

ware version is installed.

5-22

Functionality of Apple CarPlay may de-

crease or be lost if there are changes to

operating systems, hardware, software or

other technologies central to supporting

the system that are outside of NISSAN’s

control. Changing government regula-

tions may also affect operation of Apple

CarPlay.

Android Auto

WARNING

.Stop your vehicle in a safe location

and apply the parking brake be-

fore connecting your Android

phone to the vehicle or operating

your connected Android phone for

setup.

.If you are unable to devote full

attention to vehicle operation

while using Android Auto, pull off

the road to a safe location and

stop your vehicle.

You can use Android Auto by connecting a

compatible Android phone to your vehicle

via a USB cable. It is also recommended to

use the Android phone OEM cable that

was provided with your phone.

With Android Auto, your in-vehicle system

can be used as a display and a controller

for some of the Android phone functions.

Voice control of some of the Android

phone functions is also possible with

Android Auto. Visit www.android.com for

information about the functions that are

available and details about Google’s

Certain vehicle information (e.g. location

and speed) may be shared with your

device while Android Auto is in use. Carrier

charges may apply to use Android Auto.

COMPATIBILITY

Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later ver-

sions are compatible with Android Auto.

Refer to the Android Auto website for

more information.

INFO:

.Download the Android Auto applica-

tion from Google Play to Android

phone in advance.

.For best results, always update your

device to the latest Android software

and Android Auto app version. When

you connect the Android phone to the

in-vehicle system, it will automatically

update Android software and Android

Auto app version.

.Android Auto will take the place of

your Bluetooth® audio and Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone functionality.

.If you set a destination with navigation

applications on your Android phone

while Android Auto is active, the route

setting of the in-vehicle navigation

5. Information

5-23

5. Information

system will be canceled.

INITIAL ANDROID PHONE SET-

TINGS

Before using Android Auto, Android Auto

app must be downloaded on your Android

phone.

For downloading the Android Auto app,

refer to the Google Play on website.

Android Auto OPERATION

Unlock your phone’s screen before con-

necting your Android phone.

1. Connect your Android phone to a USB

connection port.

For models with two USB connection

ports, your Android phone must be

connected to USB connection port 1

for Android Auto operation.

“USB (Universal Serial Bus) Con-

nection Port and AUX (auxiliary)

input jack” (page 2-12)

2. Depending on the setting, a Startup

Information screen will appear on the

touch screen display. Touch [Yes] to

use Android Auto.

INFO:

.If you do not wish to display the

Startup Information screen each

time you activate Android Auto,

touch [Don’t ask anymore] on the

Startup Information screen. The

Startup Information screen will not

be displayed from the next Android

Auto activation. The Startup Infor-

mation screen can be set to appear

again in the Android Auto setting

menu.

“Android Auto settings”

(page 5-25)

.Bluetooth® will turn on automati-

cally when Android Auto is con-

nected to the vehicle.

Example of Android Auto top menu

3. The Android Auto top menu screen will

appear. The Android phone functions

displayed on the screen should now be

operable using the in-vehicle system.

4. To return to the Android Auto top

menu screen after operation, touch

[] on the lower right corner of the

Android Auto screen.

5. To exit the Android Auto screen and

display the other screens, push

<MENU> or the other buttons on the

control panel and touch the desired

menus.

6. To return to the Android Auto screen,

touch [Info] on the Launch Bar and

then touch [Android Auto]. The An-

droid Auto screen can also be dis-

played by touching [Android Auto]

after touching [MENU] on the Launch

Bar or after pushing <MENU>.

INFO:

.While the Android Auto is activated on

the Android phone, the phone opera-

tions such as making or receiving calls

can only be done with Android Auto.

.When an Android phone is connected

to the USB connection port, the Blue-

tooth® function turns on automati-

cally. Keep the Bluetooth® turned on

to use the phone functions.

.Depending on the device, an Android

phone requires MTP mode to be se-

lected in the USB transfer setting.

5-24

Operating with voice

Some of the functions in your Android

phone can be voice controlled when

Android Auto is active.

Activation:

There are three ways to start a voice

operation session.

.Push and hold <>/< > on the

steering wheel.

.Touch [ ] at the upper right corner of

the Android Auto screen.

.Say “OK Google” (requires the appro-

priate setting on the Android phone).

INFO:

.Push <>/< > or touch [ ] to end

voice operation.

.Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to

eliminate the surrounding noises (traf-

fic noises, vibration sounds, etc.),

which may prevent the system from

recognizing the voice commands cor-

rectly.

.For functions that can be used with

the voice operation, refer to the An-

droid Auto website.

.The volume level of voice operation

can be adjusted.

“Volume and Beeps settings”

(page 2-24)

Phone operation (if so equipped)

If you wish to use your phone while

Android Auto is activated, follow the

procedure below:

1. Touch [Phone] on the Launch Bar.

2. Operate the screen displayed to make

a call, etc.

Android Auto SETTINGS

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Android Auto Settings].

Available items:

.[Always Start Android Auto]:

When this item is turned on, Android

Auto will activate automatically when

the Android phone is connected to the

USB connection port.

.[Show Startup Information]:

Allows you to set whether or not to

show the Android Auto Startup Infor-

mation screen upon each Android

phone connection.

Touch [No] if you do not wish to show

the Startup Information screen each

time the Android phone is connected

to USB connection port.

Touch [Yes] to show the Startup In-

formation screen upon each connec-

tion of your Android phone to USB

connection port.

This setting item will be grayed out

until you touch [Don’t ask anymore] on

the Startup Information screen to turn

the setting on.

.[Nissan’s Help for Android Auto]:

Displays helpful tips for Android Auto

operation.

INFO:

.For models with two USB connection

ports, your Android phone must be

connected to USB connection port 1

for Android Auto operation.

.[Nissan’s Help for Android Auto] can

also be accessed from the Information

menu.

.For restrictions on using Android Auto,

refer to [Nissan’s Help for Android

Auto].

.The Phone menu of the in-vehicle

system and access to the connected

phone through the Voice Recognition

System will be disabled while Android

Auto is connected. To access your

5. Information

5-25

5. Information

phone, use the voice operation func-

tion or touch [Phone] on the Launch

Bar on the Android Auto top menu

screen.

Android Auto SYSTEM LIMITA-

TIONS

For all features of Android Auto to operate

correctly, it is necessary to have a com-

patible Android phone, a cellular connec-

tion and a data plan. When Android Auto is

operating, system performance is af-

fected by the strength of the cellular

connection or performance of the phone

itself. If performance of the system de-

creases:

.Disconnect and reconnect your phone

.Close all apps and restart them

.Cycle phone power off/on to restart

It should also be confirmed that the latest

version of both Android OS and Android

Auto application are installed on the

cellular phone.

Functionality of Android Auto may de-

crease or be lost if there are changes to

operating systems, hardware, software or

other technologies central to supporting

the system that are outside of NISSAN’s

control. Changing government regula-

tions may also affect operation of Android

Auto.

5-26

6 Navigation
Safety information ....................................................................... 6-3
Map operation ................................................................................. 6-3
Displaying current vehicle location .......................... 6-3
Map types..................................................................................... 6-3
Road color ................................................................................... 6-6
Moving map................................................................................ 6-6
Changing scale of map ..................................................... 6-7
Changing map.......................................................................... 6-8
Map view settings .................................................................. 6-9
Setting information on map....................................... 6-12
Traffic information on map (for U.S.
and Canada)............................................................................ 6-13
Map Menu screen ............................................................... 6-13
Setting destination ................................................................... 6-14
Basic operations .................................................................. 6-14
Finding address .................................................................... 6-17
Finding nearby place ........................................................ 6-18
Finding points of interest ............................................. 6-19
Setting home as destination ..................................... 6-21
Searching from address book .................................. 6-21
Searching from previous destinations ............... 6-22
Searching by connecting to the internet (if
so equipped) ........................................................................... 6-22
Setting intersection ........................................................... 6-22
Setting by phone number ............................................ 6-23
Setting city center .............................................................. 6-23
Setting freeway entrance/exit.................................. 6-24
Setting from stored routes ....................................... 6-24
Setting point on map .................................................... 6-25
Setting with NissanConnect
SM
Services (if
so equipped) ......................................................................... 6-25
Options before starting the
route guidance ................................................................... 6-26
Route guidance .......................................................................... 6-28
About route guidance................................................... 6-28
Route menu .......................................................................... 6-34
Setting new destination .............................................. 6-37
Canceling Route ................................................................ 6-37
Confirming route .............................................................. 6-37
Editing route ......................................................................... 6-37
Recalculating route ......................................................... 6-40
Searching for detour route using traffic
information (for U.S. and Canada) ....................... 6-40
Setting detour route ...................................................... 6-41
Route guidance settings............................................. 6-41
Viewing traffic information (for U.S.
and Canada) ................................................................................. 6-47
Viewing available traffic information ................ 6-47
Traffic information setting ........................................ 6-49
Storing a location/route ..................................................... 6-50
Storing location ................................................................. 6-50
Storing route ........................................................................ 6-51
Storing avoid area ........................................................... 6-51
Editing stored information ........................................ 6-53
Deleting stored item ...................................................... 6-55

Transferring information to/from

address book.......................................................................... 6-56

Navigation settings .................................................................. 6-58

General information for navigation system ......... 6-61

Current vehicle location ................................................ 6-61

Route calculation .............................................................. 6-65

Route guidance .................................................................. 6-66

Map data ................................................................................. 6-67

How to handle the SD card ...................................... 6-75

SAFETY INFORMATION

The navigation system is primarily de-

signed to help you reach your destination.

However, you, the driver, must use the

system safely and properly. Information

concerning road conditions, traffic signs

and the availability of services may not

always be up to date. The system is not a

substitute for safe, proper, and legal driv-

ing.

WARNING

Do not rely on route guidance alone.

Always be sure that all driving man-

euvers are legal and safe in order to

avoid accidents.

MAP OPERATION

DISPLAYING CURRENT VEHICLE

LOCATION

Push <MAP> or touch [Map] on the

Launch Bar to display the map of current

vehicle location.

MAP TYPES

Two types of map views are available: 2D

map and Birdview™ (3D) map.

6. Navigation

6-3

6. Navigation

2D map

The 2D map displays the map in a two-dimensional environment similar to a road map.

Screen information:

Destination:

Indicates the location of the final

destination.

Waypoint:

Displays the location of the waypoint

the vehicle will stop by before heading

to the final destination. A maximum of

5 waypoints can be set.

Guide point:

Indicates a guide point on the route.

Starting point:

Displays the vehicle location, with

which the route is set, as the starting

point.

Avoid area:

Displays the areas to avoid that are

stored in the Address Book. Route

guidance can be set to avoid the

registered avoid areas.

“Storing avoid area” (page 6-51)

Green: Freeways included

Blue: Freeways not included

Speed limit icon:

Displays the speed limit of the road

the vehicle is on.

Arrow and distance:

Indicates the distance to the next

guide point and the turning direction

at that guide point.

icon:

Touch the icon to display the Map

Menu.

“Map Menu screen” (page 6-13)

Scale indicator:

Indicates the scale of the map.

Touch the icon to display the scale

bar. The map scale can be adjusted

using the scale bar.

“Changing scale of map”

(page 6-7)

/ Direction indicator:

Indicates the directional setting of the

map.

: North always pointing up.

: Direction of the vehicle heading

6-4

always pointing up.

Touch the icon to change the map

view and the map orientation.

“Changing map view and map

orientation” (page 6-8)

Remaining distance to the destina-

tion:

Indicates the approximate remaining

distance to the destination or way-

point. This indicator will appear when

a destination or waypoint is set and

route guidance is started.

The arrow displayed here indicates

the direction of the destination. It can

be displayed only when the map scale

is in the range of 1/64 miles (25 m) -

1/8 miles (200 m).

Estimated time to the destination:

Indicates the estimated time to the

destination or waypoint. This indica-

tor will appear when a destination or

waypoint is set and route guidance is

started.

“Guidance settings” (page 6-42)

Traffic indicator (for U.S. and Canada):

Indicates the reception condition of

the traffic information transmitted

from the provider.

Green: Reception condition is good.

Gray: Reception condition is not good.

The indicator does not appear with-

out a SiriusXM Traffic subscription.

Vehicle icon:

Indicates the current vehicle location

and the direction the vehicle is head-

ing.

Suggested route:

Appears in bold blue during route

guidance.

Stored location (yellow):

Displays the locations that are stored

in the Address Book.

“Storing location” (page 6-50)

The icons can be changed according

to your preferences.

Street name:

Displays the name of the street that

the vehicle is currently driving on.

Voice Menu button (if so equipped):

Touch the icon to connect to the

NissanConnect

Services Voice

Menu.

“Connecting to Interactive Voice

Menu” (page 5-12)

Birdview™ (3D) map

Birdview™ displays the map from an

elevated perspective. In Birdview™, it is

easy to recognize an image of the route

because it provides a panoramic view

over a long distance.

INFO:

Note the following items about the Bird-

view™ display.

.“Birdview™” is a registered trademark

of Clarion Co., Ltd.

.The map in Birdview™ always appears

with the current forward direction

facing up.

6. Navigation

6-5

6. Navigation

Building graphics

In an area where the building graphics are

stored in the map data, the building

graphics are displayed when the map is

zoomed in. On the 2D map display, these

are called “Building footprint graphics”,

and on the Birdview™ display, these are

called “3D building graphics”.

Building footprint graphics (2D map)

3D building graphics (Birdview™ map)

INFO:

In an area where the building graphics are

not stored in the map data, the normal

map is displayed even when the map is

zoomed in.

ROAD COLOR

The road types are differentiated by color.

Red Freeway

Brown

Dark Yellow

Main road

Gray Narrow street

Dark green Road with incomplete

map data

MOVING MAP

Map can be scrolled by touch screen

operations. Map scrolling operations are

limited and not fully available while driv-

ing.

Touch:

2D map:

When the map on the screen is touched,

the cross pointer is displayed and the

position touched is set as the center of

the screen.

After moving the map, touch [ ] on the

map screen to display the current location

map screen.

INFO:

.Touch [Slow] on the map screen to

display the 8-directional key for fine

adjustments of the location. Touch

[Cancel] to cancel the fine adjustment

mode.

.Sliding the Display Commander (if so

equipped) can also operate the map.

Birdview

(3D) map:

6-6

Touch the screen. The cross pointer is

displayed at the center of the map.

Touching the screen again will scroll the

map toward the touched location.

Touch [ ]or[ ] to change the direction

of the map.

INFO:

Sliding the Display Commander (if so

equipped) can also operate the map.

Long touch:

Touch the direction to move to. The map

continues to scroll while the screen is

touched.

Drag:

Drags the map while the screen is

touched.

Swipe/flick:

Swipe or flick the screen to scroll the map

screen quickly.

CHANGING SCALE OF MAP

1. Touch [ ].

The scale bar is displayed.

2. Touch [ZOOM IN] or [ZOOM OUT] to

change the scale.

Pinch-in

To view a wider area, pinch-in the map

screen.

Pinch-out

To view the map in detail, pinch-out the

map screen.

INFO:

.While driving, pinch-in and pinch-out

operations are disabled.

.Map scale can also be changed by

rotating </SOUND> (if so

equipped) or the center dial on the

Display Commander (if so equipped).

.Free Zoom:

Depending on the setting, using the

</SOUND> (if so equipped) or

center dial on the Display Commander

(if so equipped) to change the map

scale may adjust the scale normally, or

it may engage the free zoom (finer

scale adjustment in smaller steps).

“Navigation settings” (page 6-58)

6. Navigation

6-7

6. Navigation

Map scale

Map scale (map coverage) between 320

miles (640 km) and 1/64 mile (25 m) can be

selected.

US Units Metric Units

320 mi 640 km

80 mi 160 km

32 mi 64 km

8mi 16km

5mi 10km

2mi 4km

1mi 2km

1/2 mi 1 km

1/4 mi 500 m

1/8 mi 200 m

1/16 mi 100 m

1/32 mi 50 m

1/64 mi 25 m

INFO:

Depending on the map scale, traffic in-

formation icons cannot be displayed on

the map screen (for U.S. and Canada).

“Traffic information on map”

(page 6-48)

CHANGING MAP

Changing map view and map

orientation

The map view and the map orientation

can be changed by touching [ ]/[ ]on

the map screen.

The screen will change to North Up,

Heading Up and Birdview

each time

[]/[ ] is touched.

North Up

Heading Up

Birdview™

INFO:

.You can also change the map view

from the map view settings screen.

“Map view settings” (page 6-9)

.A long range map is available that

displays a wider area in the direction

the vehicle is moving in the Heading

Up view.

“Map view settings” (page 6-9)

Setting split screen

Two different maps can be displayed on a

screen with the split screen setting.

6-8

1. Touch [ ] on the map screen.

2. Touch [Map View].

3. Touch [Change View].

4. Select [Split: 2D Map] or [Split: Birdview

Map].

INFO:

The settings on the left split map can be

changed from map view settings menu.

“Map view settings” (page 6-9)

MAP VIEW SETTINGS

The setup for the map view is performed

from the Settings menu on the touch

screen display.

1. Touch [ ] on the map screen.

2. Touch [Map View].

INFO:

[Map View] can also be accessed from

[Settings] on the Launch Bar.

“Navigation settings” (page 6-58)

6. Navigation

6-9

6. Navigation

The following settings are available.

Menu item Action

[Change View] [2D Map] Display 2D map.

[Split: 2D Map] Display 2D map on both left and right side of the split screen.

[Birdview (3D)] Display 3D map.

[Split: Birdview Map] Display 2D map on the left side and 3D map on the right side of the

screen.

[View Settings] [Intersection] Display the enlarged view of intersection on the left side of the

screen during route guidance.

“Route guidance screens” (page 6-32)

[Turn List] Display the turn list on the left screen when a route is set.

“Route guidance screens” (page 6-32)

[Drive Report] (if so equipped) Display your ECO driving performance score on the left side of the

screen. Touch [Log] to view the Drive Report history. Touch [Reset]

to clear the past records.

Push <MAP> to switch to the full map screen.

[Full Map] Display full map screen.

[Map Settings] [Map Orientation] [North Up] Select a map view to be applied to the map screen. [Map

Orientation] is available only when 2D map is displayed.

[Heading Up]

[Long Range] The position of the vehicle icon can be changed to view a wider

area in the traveling direction. The vehicle icon is located slightly

lower than the center of the screen. Long Range Map View is

available only when the map view is “Heading Up”.

[Map Color] Sets map color from color 1 - 4.

[Map Text Size] [Large] Sets the font size of text displayed on the map screen.

[Medium]

6-10

Menu item Action

[Small]

[Birdview Angle] Adjusts the Birdview™ angle using the adjust bar displayed on the

left side of the screen. [Birdview Angle] is available only when 3D

map is displayed.

[North Up when Zoomed Out] When this setting is ON, the orientation of the map is automatically

changed to North Up when the widest map scale is selected.

[Select Text to Display

on Map]

[Place Names] Allows place names to be displayed on the map screen.

[Facility Names] Allows facilities names to be displayed on the map screen.

[Road Names] Allows road names to be displayed on the map screen.

[Left Split Map Set-

tings]

[Map Orientation] The map orientation for the left side of split screen can be selected

from North Up or Heading Up.

[Long Range] Long Range Map View is available only when the left side of split

screen is in Heading Up mode.

With this item turned on, the vehicle position icon on the left

screen will be located slightly lower than the center of the screen

so that a wider area in the traveling direction can be viewed.

[Map Scale] Allows to change the scale of the map displayed on the left side of

the split screen.

[Show all Freeway Exits on Route] (for U.S. and

Canada)

Turns on/off the freeway exit information display.

[Auto. Show Turn List on Freeway] The turn list can be set to on or off to be displayed automatically

while driving on a freeway.

[Back to Map] Back to the current location map.

6. Navigation

6-11

6. Navigation

SETTING INFORMATION ON MAP

Some information on the map can be

displayed or hidden.

Displaying map icons

Displays map icons of certain points of

interest (such as restaurants and gas

stations, etc.) on the map around the

current vehicle location.

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Navigation].

3. Touch [Map Icons].

4. Touch the preferred icon. The indica-

tor of the selected icon illuminates.

Available setting icons

.Restaurant:

.Gas Station:

.Hotel:

.ATM:

.Rest Area:

INFO:

.[Map Icons] can also be accessed from

[] on the Map screen.

.The map icons are not displayed on

the map screen when the map scale is

set to 1/4 mile (500 m) or wider in the

2D and Birdview™ map.

.If brand icons are registered in the

map data, the brand will be displayed

on the map instead of the general map

icons listed.

Displaying map scrolling informa-

tion

Information about the location, on which

the center of the cross pointer is placed by

scrolling on the map, can be set to be

displayed.

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Navigation] and touch [Others].

3. Touch [Map Scrolling Information].

4. Touch the preferred information item.

The following information items are

available.

.[Address Book Icons]

.[Destination/Waypoint Icons]

.[Show pop-up for POIs]

.[Latitude/Longitude Info]

INFO:

.When the settings are turned on,

placing the cross pointer on the stored

location icons, Destination/Waypoint

icons or map icons will display the

information in a pop-up window. The

latitude/longitude of any point on the

map where the cross pointer is located

will be displayed on the bottom left

corner of the map screen.

.When the [Go Here] is displayed on the

pop-up window, destination can be

set by touching it. Touch [Place Info] to

display the place information screen.

On the place information screen,

touch [Show Map] to display the map

around the location and touch [Call] to

call the selected place if the key is

6-12

available. When available, touch [De-

tails] to show detail information of the

place.

TRAFFIC INFORMATION ON MAP

(for U.S. and Canada)

With a subscription to SiriusXM Traffic,

traffic information is displayed.

“Traffic information on map”

(page 6-48)

Free Flow: Green arrow

Moderate traffic: Yellow arrow

Heavy traffic: Red

Section affected by serious traffic event:

Purple

The following traffic information icons

may be displayed.

: Accident

: Closed road

: Information

: Road work

: Slippery road

: Weather

: Incident

INFO:

Traffic icons are displayed in the scale

level of 1/64 miles (25 m) - 5 miles (10 km)

range. Some traffic icons are displayed

only on the map at higher detail levels.

MAP MENU SCREEN

Touch [ ] while the current location

map screen or a scrolled map screen is

displayed to display the menu corre-

sponding to that screen.

This menu can be used to quickly access

helpful functions, such as setting a desti-

nation and searching for points of interest

nearby.

Current location map screen

If [ ] is touched while the current

location map screen is displayed, the

following options are available.

.[Save Location]:

Stores the current vehicle location in

the Address Book.

“Storing location by moving map”

(page 6-51)

.[Nearby POIs]:

Searches for points of interest near

the current vehicle location.

“Finding nearby place” (page 6-18)

.[Map View]:

Map view settings can be changed.

“Map view settings” (page 6-9)

.[Map Icons]:

The map icons can be displayed or

hidden by type.

“Displaying map icons” (page 6-12)

6. Navigation

6-13

6. Navigation

.[Traffic Info Setting] (for U.S.and Cana-

da):

Set the various functions of the Sir-

iusXM Traffic information system.

“Traffic information on map”

(page 6-48)

.[Cancel Route]:

Delete destination and waypoints.

“Canceling Route” (page 6-37)

Scrolled location map screen

If [ ] is touched while a scrolled map

screen is displayed, the following options

are available.

.[New Destination]:

Sets the map location pointed at by

the cross pointer as a new destination.

“Setting point on map”

(page 6-25)

.[Add to Route]:

Adds the map location pointed at by

the cross pointer as a destination or a

waypoint to the route already set.

“Setting destination or waypoint”

(page 6-38)

.[Nearby POIs]:

Searches for points of interest near

the map location.

“Finding nearby place” (page 6-18)

.[Save Location]:

Stores the map location pointed at by

the cross pointer in the Address Book.

“Storing location by moving map”

(page 6-51)

.[Delete]:

Deletes a stored location or destina-

tion (waypoint) which the cross poin-

ter is placed over an icon.

“Deleting individual item on map”

(page 6-56)

SETTING DESTINATION

The destination you wish to drive to can

be set for route guidance.

BASIC OPERATIONS

Displaying destination setting

There are several methods that can be

used to set a destination. Select a pre-

ferred method for finding and setting a

destination.

Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

The destination screen will be displayed

when a route is not set.

6-14

INFO:

If a route is set, the route menu screen will

be displayed when [Navi] on the Launch

Bar is touched. Touch [New Destination]

to set a destination.

“Route menu” (page 6-34)

Available destination setting methods:

Setting item Action

[Street Address] Searches for a destination by address.

“Finding address” (page 6-17)

[Nearby Points of Interest] Searches for points of interest near the current vehicle location, such as restaurants and

gas stations, etc.

“Finding nearby place” (page 6-18)

[Points of Interest] Searches for a destination from various categories of businesses or locations.

“Finding points of interest” (page 6-19)

[Home] Searches for a route from the current location to the previously stored home location.

“Setting home as destination” (page 6-21)

[Address Book] Searches for a destination from Address Book.

“Searching from address book” (page 6-21)

[Previous Destinations] Searches for the destination from the previous destinations and a previous start point.

“Searching from previous destinations” (page 6-22)

[Connected Search] (if so equipped) Input a keyword of a point of interest and connect and search the NissanConnected

Services Data Center.

“Searching by connecting to the internet” (page 6-22)

[Intersection] Sets an intersection as a destination.

“Setting intersection” (page 6-22)

[Phone Number] Searches for a point of interest by a telephone number.

“Setting by phone number” (page 6-23)

6. Navigation

6-15

6. Navigation

Setting item Action

[City Center] Sets the center of a city as the destination.

“Setting city center” (page 6-23)

[Freeway Entrance/Exit] Sets a freeway entrance/exit as a destination.

“Setting freeway entrance/exit” (page 6-24)

[Stored Routes] Sets a route from the stored route data.

“Setting from stored routes” (page 6-24)

INFO:

.After setting a destination, the location

of the destination can be adjusted and

the location can be stored in the

Address Book, etc.

“Options before starting the route

guidance” (page 6-26)

.The destination can be deleted.

“Canceling Route” (page 6-37)

6-16

Specifying region

With some destination setting methods,

state/province and city can be specified

prior to searching for destination loca-

tions.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch the desired search method.

3. Touch [State/Province] or [City] if dis-

played.

4. Enter the name of the state, province

or city and then touch [List]. A list

screen is displayed.

5. Touch the preferred state, province or

city from the list.

INFO:

.When the system is restarted, the state

and province in which the vehicle is

recognized by the GPS to be located

will be set automatically as a state and

province for location search.

.Touch [Change Area] to change the

area for conducting the location

search (for U.S. and Canada).

.Touch [Current State] to search for the

destination within the state or pro-

vince where the vehicle is currently

located.

.Touch [Space] to enter a space be-

tween letters.

.After touching [City], touch [Last 5

Cities] to display the last 5 cities set

as destinations.

.In some cases, when a city name has

been entered, the number of matching

destinations in the “Matches” column

may be different from the number

displayed on the list screen. If this

occurs, enter more characters to

further reduce the number of

matches.

.It is not possible to search for a route

from the continental United States,

Canada or Mexico to Hawaii, Virgin

Islands, Puerto Rico, etc.

FINDING ADDRESS

Searches for a destination by address.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Street Address]. The street

address input screen is displayed.

3. Input the street address.

.Touch [State/Province] to enter the

state or province name.

.Touch [House #] to enter the house

number. If the house number is not

available, touch [No House #].

.Touch [Street] to enter the street

name. After finishing the entry,

touch [List]. A list of streets is

displayed.

.Touch [City] to enter the city name.

If the city name is not available,

touch [All Cities].

6. Navigation

6-17

6. Navigation

4. Enter the state/province, house num-

ber, street and city of the destination

and then touch [OK]. The route is

displayed.

5. Touch [Start] to start route guidance.

Voice command

For U.S. and Canada

1. Push <>/< > located on the

steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a com-

mand.

Use the following voice command to

search for a destination by address:

“Street Address”*

*: This voice command operation is avail-

able only when the language setting is in

English.

FINDING NEARBY PLACE

A facility located near the current vehicle

location can be set as the destination.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Nearby Points of Interest]. The

category list is displayed.

3. Select [Emergency Services] for exam-

ple.

4. Select preferred category from the sub

category list.

5. Touch the preferred destination from

the list. The position of the selected

location is displayed in the preview on

the touch screen display.

INFO:

.If the suggested route is already set,

by touching [Show Along Route] on

the touch screen display, the sys-

tem displays only the facilities lo-

cated along the route.

.A maximum of 100 facilities can be

displayed on the list screen.

6. Touch [Start] to start route guidance.

INFO:

.Depending on the type of facility, a

message asking if you have checked

the facility availability may be dis-

played. Touch [Yes] or [No] after read-

ing the message.

.You can also set the destination by

touching [ ] when scrolling the map

and selecting [Nearby POIs] from the

menu.

.Nearby Points of Interest category list

can be customized from [Customize

Nearby POIs].

“Navigation settings” (page 6-58)

6-18

Voice command

1. Push <>/< > located on the

steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a com-

mand.

Use the following voice command to set a

nearby place as a destination:

“Nearby”

FINDING POINTS OF INTEREST

This allows you to find a facility by name

or by category. Specify the region and city

of the destination to find it more quickly.

NOTE:

Locations and business hours of facil-

ities are subject to change, which may

not be reflected in the map data. Dou-

ble-check this information before you

go to an emergency facility to ensure

that you can receive the proper support.

Otherwise, you may not receive emer-

gency help when you arrive at the

destination.

A confirmation message also appears

on the navigation screen. Follow the

displayed instructions and check the

items required.

Searching for a specific name

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Points of Interest].

3. Touch [Spell Name]. A character input

screen is displayed.

INFO:

Touch [City] and touch [Last 5 Cities] to

display the last 5 cities recently set as

destinations.

4. Enter the name of the destination

facility. After finishing the entry, touch

[List]. A list screen is displayed.

5. Touch the preferred destination facil-

ity from the list.

Sorting and filtering:

.[By Distance]:

Shows a list of facilities that are

near the current vehicle location.

.[By Category]:

Display the list that summarizes the

listed names into categories. Select

the category to narrow down the

search.

INFO:

.Touch [ i ] on the list screen to

display the detailed information

about the POI that is selected on

the touch screen display.

.For U.S. and Canada:

To search for a POI with two or

more words, touch [Space] to enter

a space between each word.

.For Mexico:

To search for a POI with two or

more words, touch [AND] between

keywords.

6. A map of the selected place is dis-

played. Touch [Start] to start route

guidance.

6. Navigation

6-19

6. Navigation

INFO:

.After setting a destination, the location

of the destination can be adjusted and

the location can be stored in the

Stored Location, etc.

“Options before starting the route

guidance” (page 6-26)

Voice command

For U.S. and Canada

1. Push <>/< > located on the

steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a com-

mand.

Use the following voice command to

search for Points of Interest from a facility

name:

“Points of Interest <POI Name>”*

*: This voice command operation is avail-

able only when the language setting is set

to English.

Searching Points of Interest by

category

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Points of Interest]. The main

category menu is displayed.

3. Touch the main category. The subca-

tegory list is displayed.

4. Touch the subcategory. Narrow down

condition screen is displayed.

5. Touch the narrow down category.

Search conditions:

.[By Name]:

Enter the name of the facility

.[Select a City]:

Input the city to narrow down the

target city.

.[Near Current Location]:

Facilities near the current vehicle

location are displayed in a list.

.[Near Destination]:

When the destination is set, this

indicates a list of facilities around

the destination.

6. Touch the preferred destination facil-

ity from the list.

Touch [Start] to start route guidance.

INFO:

.Subcategories may not be displayed

depending on the selected main cate-

gory.

.If there is no nearby POI, a message

asking whether to search from an

extended area will be displayed. When

[Yes] is selected, the system starts to

search for POI in a wider area.

.Touch [ i ] on the list screen to display

the detailed information about the POI

that is selected on the touch screen

display.

.Touch [By Distance] to sort the list by

the distance. Touch [New Category] to

select a different POI category.

6-20

Voice command

1. Push <>/< > located on the

steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a com-

mand.

Use the following voice command to

search for Points of Interest from cate-

gory:

“POI Category”

SETTING HOME AS DESTINATION

The home location can be set as the

destination if the home location is stored

in advance. This function is especially

useful when searching for a route to

return to the home location.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Home].

INFO:

If the home location is not stored yet,

the system will display a message

asking if you wish to store a home

location. Touch [Yes] to store the

home location.

“Storing home location”

(page 6-50)

3. An entire route to the destination is

displayed. Touch [Start] to start route

guidance.

Voice command

1. Push <>/< > located on the

steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a com-

mand.

Use the following voice command to set

home as the destination:

“Go Home”

SEARCHING FROM ADDRESS

BOOK

Locations frequently visited can be stored

in the Address Book and reused to set

destinations.

“Storing location” (page 6-50)

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Address Book].

3. Touch the preferred location from the

list.

INFO:

.Selecting [Sort] displays a list of

various sort functions.

— [Sorted By Number]:

The Address Book entries are dis-

played in ascending numerical or-

der.

— [Sorted By Name]:

The Address Book entries are dis-

played in alphabetic order.

— [Sorted By Icon]:

By selecting a particular icon, a list

that contains only the Address

Book entries associated with that

icon is displayed.

— [Sorted By Group]:

By selecting a particular group (fa-

mily, friends, leisure, etc.), the se-

lected group is displayed at the top

of the list.

.Touch [Add New] to add a new

location.

4. The selected destination is displayed.

Touch [Start] to start route guidance.

6. Navigation

6-21

6. Navigation

Voice command

1. Push <>/< > located on the

steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a com-

mand.

Use the following voice command to set a

destination from the Address Book:

“Address Book”

SEARCHING FROM PREVIOUS

DESTINATIONS

A previous destination and a previous

start point can be set as the destination.

Up to 100 previous destinations will be

automatically stored. If the number of

previous destinations exceeds 100, the

oldest one is automatically deleted and

the new destination is added.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Previous Destinations]. A list

screen is displayed.

3. Touch the previous destination or a

previous start point from the list.

4. Touch [Start] to start route guidance.

Voice command

1. Push <>/< > located on the

steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a com-

mand.

Use the following voice commands to

display the previous destinations/start

point list:

“Previous Destinations”

“Previous Start Point”

SEARCHING BY CONNECTING TO

THE INTERNET (if so equipped)

It is possible to find a point of interest by

inputting a keyword and connecting to

the Internet. The searched location can be

set as a destination.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Connected Search].

3. Enter the keyword and touch [Search].

The system will connect to the Nissan-

Connect

Services and the search

results will be displayed.

4. Touch the preferred destination from

the list.

5. The entire destination is displayed.

Touch [Start] to start route guidance.

INFO:

Connected Search is a NissanConnect

Services feature. It is necessary to sub-

scribe to NissanConnect

Services in

order to use the feature.

SETTING INTERSECTION

It is possible to set an intersection of any

two streets as the destination and have

the system calculate a route.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Intersection]. Intersection

screen is displayed.

3. Input the Intersection.

.Touch [State/Province] to enter the

state or province name if necessary.

.Touch [City] to enter the city name.

.Touch [1st Street] to enter the first

street name. After finishing the

entry, touch [List]. A list screen is

6-22

displayed.

.After first street information is en-

tered, touch [2nd Street] to enter

the second street name. After fin-

ishing the entry, touch [List]. A list

screen is displayed.

4. Enter the state/province, city, and

street of the destination and then

touch [OK]. The route is displayed.

5. The selected destination is displayed

at the center of the map. Touch [Start]

to start route guidance.

Voice command

For U.S. and Canada

1. Push <>/< > located on the

steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a com-

mand.

Use the following voice command to set

an intersection as destination:

“Intersection”*

*: This voice command operation is avail-

able only when the language setting is set

to English.

SETTING BY PHONE NUMBER

If the phone number of a facility is known,

it is possible to search for a facility by

entering the phone number.

INFO:

.If the area code of the specified tele-

phone number does not exist in the

map data, the system cannot search

for the location.

.Only the locations included in the

database in the map data can be

searched for by phone number. Resi-

dential phone numbers cannot be

used to search for a location.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Phone Number]. The telephone

number input screen is displayed.

3. Enter the telephone number including

the area code. After finishing entry,

touch [OK].

4. The selected destination is displayed.

Touch [Start] after confirming the

location of the displayed destination.

INFO:

If there are more than one location

registered for the phone number, a list

screen is displayed. Touch an item on the

list to select a preferred location.

SETTING CITY CENTER

It is possible to set the center of a

specified city as a destination.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [City Center]. A character input

screen is displayed.

3. Enter the name of the city and touch

[List]. A list screen is displayed.

INFO:

Touch [Last 5 Cities] to display the last

5 cities recently set as destinations.

4. Touch the preferred destination from

the list.

INFO:

Touch [By Distance] to sort the list by

the nearest distance. Touch [By Name]

to sort the list by the alphabetic order.

5. The selected destination is displayed

on the map. Touch [Start] after con-

firming the location of the displayed

destination.

6. Navigation

6-23

6. Navigation

Voice command

For U.S. and Canada

1. Push <>/< > located on the

steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a com-

mand.

Use the following voice command to set

city center as a destination:

“City Center”*

*: This voice command operation is avail-

able only when the language setting is in

English.

SETTING FREEWAY ENTRANCE/

EXIT

It is possible to set the destination to an

entrance or exit of a freeway.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Freeway Entrance/Exit] to dis-

play the keyboard input screen.

3. Enter the name of the freeway. After

finishing entry, touch [List].

4. Touch the preferred freeway.

5. Touch [Entrance] or [Exit]. A list screen

is displayed.

6. Touch the preferred destination from

the list. The selected location is dis-

played in the preview on the touch

screen display.

INFO:

Touch [By Distance] to sort the list by

the nearest distance.

7. Touch [Start] to start route guidance.

SETTING FROM STORED ROUTES

It is possible to select a preferred route

from the stored routes.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Stored Routes]. A list screen is

displayed.

3. Touch the preferred route from the

list.

4. The entire route is shown on the map.

Touch [Start] to start route guidance.

INFO:

.The stored route only includes loca-

tions (destination and waypoints) and

route calculation conditions, not the

route itself. Therefore, when the desti-

nation is set using a stored route, a

different route may be suggested if

the current vehicle location is different

from the one when the route was

stored.

.To store the current route, touch

[Store Current Route]. A route can be

stored only when it includes one or

more waypoints.

“Storing route” (page 6-51)

6-24

SETTING POINT ON MAP

It is possible to set a location scrolled to

on the map as the destination and have

the system calculate a route.

1. Scroll the map, place the cross pointer

over the preferred location, and touch

[].

INFO:

The point on the blinking road where

the center of the cross pointer is

located can be set as a destination.

2. Touch [New Destination].

3. The entire route is shown on the touch

screen display. Touch [Start] to start

route guidance.

INFO:

If a point on a freeway is set as the

destination, a confirmation message is

displayed.

SETTING WITH NISSANCON-

NECT

SERVICES (if so equipped)

It is possible to set the destination using

the NissanConnect

Services features.

“NissanConnect

Services”

(page 5-7)

INFO:

Use of NissanConnect

Services features

is dependent upon a valid subscription

and the telematics device being in opera-

tive condition, as well as cellular connec-

tivity, navigation map data and GPS

satellite signal reception being available.

Setting from information feeds

If the downloaded NissanConnect

Ser-

vices information feed has location data,

you can set it as a destination. It is also

possible to use NissanConnect

Services

features such as “Destination Download”,

“Send to Car” or “Journey Planner”, etc. to

set a destination.

For details of the services and settings,

refer to NissanConnect

Services web-

site or contact the NissanConnect

Ser-

vices support line.

NissanConnect

Services website:

For U.S.

www.nissanusa.com/connect

For Canada

www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect

(English)

www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect/fr

(French)

NissanConnect

Services support

line:

1-855-426-6628

1. Touch [Info] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [NissanConnect Services].

3. Touch [All Information Feeds]. A list

screen is displayed.

4. Touch a preferred folder. A list of

information feeds is displayed.

5. Touch a preferred information feed.

6. Navigation

6-25

6. Navigation

INFO:

The methods for setting a destination

differ depending on the specific service

(Roadside Assistance Service, Assisted

Search, Destination Download, Connected

Search, etc.) and NissanConnect

Ser-

vices may be updated during ownership.

Please see the NissanConnect

Services

website for the latest features and ser-

vices, as well as the most up-to-date user

guide.

NissanConnect

Services website:

For U.S.

www.nissanusa.com/connect

For Canada

www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect

(English)

www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect/fr

(French)

Searching by using Voice Menu

button on map

It is possible to set a destination by

touching the Voice Menu button on

the map. You can choose from the options

provided by the voice guidance and speak

your choice, or ask the NissanConnect

Services Response Specialists directly to

search for your destination.

“Connecting to Interactive Voice

Menu” (page 5-12)

OPTIONS BEFORE STARTING THE

ROUTE GUIDANCE

Before starting the route guidance, select

menus for route details to modify the

route, preview the turn list, or store the

route.

There are two types of route details menu

that are displayed depending on the

conditions and the methods used to set

the destinations.

Example 1:

.[Start]:

Starts route guidance to the selected

destination.

.[More Routes]:

— [Fastest]

Selects a route that is shortest in

time.

— [Min. FWY]

Selects a route with minimum use

of freeways.

— [Short. Dist.]

Selects a route that is shortest in

distance.

.[Route Info]:

Route Information such as turn list and

scrolled map can be displayed. The

route can also be saved for future use.

6-26

.[Add Way Pt.]:

Route can be edited by adding a

destination or a waypoint.

— If a waypoint is added, three alter-

native routes cannot be selected.

— It is possible to edit or add a

destination or waypoints to the

route that is already set.

“Editing route” (page 6-37)

INFO:

Choosing different route search condi-

tions in [More Routes] may not always

generate results search for different

routes.

Example 2:

.[Start]:

Starts route guidance to the selected

destination.

.[Route Details]:

Displays information of the route and

allows the route to be edited.

The menu shown in Example 1 is

displayed.

.[Move Location]:

Displays a map screen and allows the

location of the destination to be ad-

justed.

.[Add to Route]:

Adds a location to the route previously

set.

.[Save Location]:

Saves the location in the Address

Book.

.[Details]:

Displays detailed information of the

destination. Touch [Show Map] to dis-

play the map around the destination.

Touch [Call] (when available) to make a

phone call to the facility set as a

destination.

6. Navigation

6-27

6. Navigation

ROUTE GUIDANCE

ABOUT ROUTE GUIDANCE

After setting the route, select [Start] to

start the route guidance.

Throughout the route guidance, the sys-

tem navigates you through the guide

points using visual and voice guidance.

WARNING

.The navigation system’s visual and

voice guidance is for reference

purposes only. The contents of

the guidance may be inappropri-

ate depending on the situation.

.Follow all traffic regulations when

driving along the suggested route

(e.g., one-way traffic).

“Route guidance” (page 6-66)

Voice guidance during route gui-

dance

Basics of voice guidance:

Voice guidance announces which direc-

tion to turn when approaching an inter-

section for which a turn is necessary.

INFO:

.There may be some cases in which

voice guidance and actual road con-

ditions do not correspond. This may

occur because of discrepancies be-

tween the actual road and the infor-

mation on the map data, or may also

be due to the vehicle speed.

.In case voice guidance does not cor-

respond to the actual road conditions,

follow the information obtained from

traffic signs or notices on the road.

.Route guidance provided by the navi-

gation system does not take carpool

lane driving into consideration, espe-

cially when carpool lanes are sepa-

rated from other road lanes.

.For U.S. and Canada:

The system will announce street

names when the system language is

set to English. Street names are not

announced when the system is set to

French or Spanish.

.For Mexico:

The system will announce street

names when the system language is

set to Spanish. Street names are not

announced when the system is set to

English or French.

INFO:

.When approaching a guide point (in-

tersection or corner), destination, etc.

during route guidance, voice guidance

announces the remaining distance

and/or turning direction. Push and

hold <MAP> to repeat voice guidance.

.Voice guidance settings can be chan-

ged from [Intersection Guidance Set-

tings].

“Guidance settings” (page 6-42)

6-28

Example of voice guidance:

“In about a quarter mile (400 meters),

right (left) turn.”

“Right (left) turn ahead.”

“In about a quarter mile (400 meters)

freeway entrance on your right onto

(road number and direction).”

“Freeway entrance on your right onto

(road number and direction).”

“In about 1 mile (2 kilometers), exit on

your right.”

“Exit on your right.”

“You have arrived at your destination.”

Directions will differ, depending on the

road type.

INFO:

Distances may vary, depending on the

vehicle speed.

Notification of intersection on ordinary

road:

1. “In about a quarter mile (400 meters),

right (left) turn.”

2. “Right (left) turn ahead.”

6. Navigation

6-29

6. Navigation

Notification of consecutive intersec-

tions on ordinary roads:

When the road has three or more con-

secutive intersections ahead, voice gui-

dance will announce the following.

1. “In about a quarter mile (400 meters),

right (left) turn, then in about a quarter

mile (400 meters) left (right) turn.”

2. “Left (right) turn ahead, then in about a

quarter mile (400 meters) right (left)

turn.”

Notification of freeway entrance:

1. “In about a quarter mile (400 meters)

freeway entrance on your right onto

(road number and direction).”

2. “Freeway entrance on your right onto

(road number and direction).”

6-30

Notification of freeway junction:

1. “In about 1 mile (2 kilometers), keep to

the right (left) onto (road number and

direction), then in about a quarter mile

(400 meters) keep to the right (left).”

2. “Keep to the right (left) onto (road

number and direction), then in about

a quarter mile (400 meters) keep to

the right (left) onto (road number and

direction).”

3. “Keep to the right (left) onto (road

number and direction).”

Notification of freeway exit:

1. “In about 1 mile (2 kilometers), exit on

your right.”

2. “Take the second exit on your right.”

Notification when approaching desti-

nation:

Ordinary road:

When approaching the destination, voice

guidance will announce, “You have arrived

at your destination.” To reach your final

destination, refer to the map screen.

Dark green road:

After passing the last turning point on a

suggested route, voice guidance will an-

nounce, “The route to your destination

includes roads through incomplete map

areas. Voice guidance will not be provided

6. Navigation

6-31

6. Navigation

in these areas.” When approaching the

endpoint of the suggested road, voice

guidance will announce, “Entering the

road with incomplete map data. The route

will be shown in a different color in this

area. Please follow traffic regulations.”

INFO:

Actual voice guidance may vary depend-

ing on road conditions and information

registered in the system.

Route guidance screens

Various guidance screens are displayed

on the touch screen display during route

guidance.

The settings of the guidance screens can

be changed.

“Map view settings” (page 6-9)

Route guidance on map screen:

When route guidance starts, the small

turn arrow and the distance to the next

guide point are displayed in the upper

right corner of the map screen. This arrow

indicates the turning direction at the next

guide point (corner or intersection). When

approaching a guide point, enlarged in-

tersection view is displayed. Also, there

may be cases where next street names

are announced.

Enlarged intersection view:

When approaching a guide point, the

system automatically changes to the split

screen and shows an enlarged view of the

intersection on the left screen. To switch

to the full map screen while the enlarged

intersection view is displayed, push

<MAP>. The distance to the guide point

and the name of the next street to drive

on are displayed on the top of the screen.

6-32

Junction guidance:

While driving on a freeway, when the

vehicle is approximately 1 mile (approxi-

mately 2 km) from a junction, the system

automatically switches to the split screen

and displays an enlarged view of the

junction on the left screen. After the

vehicle passes the junction, the system

automatically returns to the full screen

mode. To switch to the full map screen

while the enlarged junction view is dis-

played, push <MAP>.

Turn list:

When [Turn List] in the view settings menu

is turned on, a turn list can be displayed on

the left side of the screen. To switch to the

full map screen, push <MAP>.

“Map view settings” (page 6-9)

The left screen automatically switches to

an enlarged view of the intersection when

approaching a guide point.

When [Turn List] and [Show all Freeway

Exit on Route] (for U.S. and Canada) are

turned on and the route includes a free-

way or toll road, all exits along the route

and its exit information (for U.S. and

Canada) will be shown in the turn list.

The exit information is shown as icons.

With [Auto. Show Turn List on Freeway]

turned on, the turn list will appear auto-

matically when driving on freeways.

“Map view settings” (page 6-9)

Selecting a waypoint from the exit

information list (for U.S. and Canada):

When exit information is displayed on the

turn list, a waypoint to a facility located

near the freeway exit can be set as a

waypoint. The facility categories that are

not shown with an icon on the turn list

cannot be selected.

1. Touch the exit where the exit informa-

tion icon is displayed. The category list

screen is displayed.

2. Touch the landmark category. A list of

facilities located near the freeway exit

is displayed.

6. Navigation

6-33

6. Navigation

INFO:

The facility categories that are not

shown with an icon cannot be se-

lected.

3. Touch the preferred facility for the

waypoint.

4. The waypoint is set, and the route

search is performed.

“Options before starting the route

guidance” (page 6-26)

5. Touch [Start] to start the route gui-

dance.

ROUTE MENU

WARNING

Always stop the vehicle in a safe

location before modifying the route

conditions. Modifying the route con-

ditions while driving may cause an

accident.

During route guidance, the route condi-

tions can be modified and the route

information can be confirmed. Set route

conditions according to your personal

preference.

Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

Route menu screen is displayed when a

destination is already set.

6-34

Available settings

Setting item Action

[New Destination] Sets the new destination.

“Setting new destination” (page 6-37)

[Cancel Route] Cancels the current route guidance.

[Route Info] [Turn List] Displays the details of the suggested route.

[Simulation] Simulates the route guidance. This function provides a detailed

image of the route with voice guidance.

“Confirming route” (page 6-37)

[Store Route] A calculated route can be stored. A route can be stored only when it

includes at least one waypoint.

[Map Scroll] A map scrolled further will be displayed.

[Edit/Add to Route] A destination or waypoint can be edited to a route that has already

been set.

“Editing route” (page 6-37)

[Settings] [Guidance Settings] [Guidance Voice] Activates or deactivates voice guidance.

[Guidance Volume] Adjust the volume level of voice guidance.

[Traffic Announcement]*

(for U.S. and Canada)

Activates or deactivates the traffic information announcements.

[Route Settings] [Basic Route Type] Set the route search conditions.

“Route Settings” (page 6-44)

[Other Routing Choices]

[Show Destination] [Move Location] Displays a map screen and allows the location of the destination to

be adjusted.

[Nearby POIs] Search for points of interest near the current vehicle location, such

as restaurants and gas stations, etc. The location can be set as a

waypoint.

[Save Location] Save the destination in the Address Book.

6. Navigation

6-35

6. Navigation

Setting item Action

[Recalculate] Manually search for the route again after changing the search

conditions, etc. and have the system calculate a route.

“Recalculating route” (page 6-40)

[Traffic Detour]* (for U.S. and Canada) Set the route search condition to detour traffic jam and traffic

accident.

“Searching for detour route using traffic information (for U.S.

and Canada)” (page 6-40)

[Detour] A detour of a specified distance can be calculated.

“Setting detour route” (page 6-41)

*: A SiriusXM Travel Link or SiriusXM Traffic subscription is necessary to receive SXM information services.

6-36

SETTING NEW DESTINATION

When the destination is already set, new

destination can be set.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [New Destination].

3. Touch the preferred destination

setting method.

“Setting destination” (page 6-14)

INFO:

You can also set a waypoint with this

operation.

CANCELING ROUTE

It is possible to delete a destination and all

waypoints that have already been set.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Cancel Route].

3. A confirmation message is displayed.

Touch [Yes] to delete the currently set

destinations and waypoints.

INFO:

The deleted destination and waypoints

cannot be reactivated.

CONFIRMING ROUTE

The route information can be confirmed

and the suggested route simulation can

be performed.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Route Info].

3. Touch the preferred item.

Available items

.[Turn List]:

Displays the details of the suggested

route guidance.

.[Simulation]:

Simulate the route guidance. This

function provides a detailed image of

the route with voice guidance.

Touch the following keys for opera-

tion.

: Pauses the simulation.

: Resumes the simulation.

: Ends the simulation.

.[Store Route]:

A calculated route can be stored. A

maximum of 5 routes can be stored.

The stored routes can easily be re-

called for future use.

.[Map Scroll]:

Displays a map screen where the

location of the destination can be

confirmed.

EDITING ROUTE

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Edit/Add to Route].

3. Edit the following settings and touch

[Calculate].

6. Navigation

6-37

6. Navigation

Available settings

[Add Destination]:

Touch to add a new destination.

Current destination:

Touch to edit or delete the destina-

tion.

“Editing/deleting destination or

waypoint” (page 6-38)

Condition for calculating a route to

the destination/waypoint:

Changes the conditions for route

calculation.

“Changing route calculation con-

ditions” (page 6-39)

[Add Waypoint]:

Touch to add a waypoint.

“Setting destination or waypoint”

(page 6-38)

Current waypoint:

Modifies or deletes the waypoint.

“Editing/deleting destination or

waypoint” (page 6-38)

[Calculate]:

After editing the route, the system

recalculates a route with new condi-

tions.

Setting destination or waypoint

A destination or waypoint can be added to

a route that has already been set. Up to 5

waypoints besides one destination can be

set.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Edit/Add to Route].

3. Touch [Add Destination] or [Add Way-

point].

INFO:

If [Add Destination] is selected, the

current destination changes to a way-

point.

4. Set a destination or waypoint. The

method of searching for a destination

or waypoint is the same as the one for

a destination.

“Setting destination” (page 6-14)

5. Touch [Add to Route] to add the

location to the route.

6. The route information with the se-

lected location added to the route is

displayed. Adjust the route calculation

conditions as necessary.

“Changing route calculation con-

ditions” (page 6-39)

7. Touch [Calculate] to confirm the route

change. The route will be recalculated.

INFO:

.The prior route will be deleted auto-

matically.

.Destinations or waypoints can also be

added from the Map Menu.

“Scrolled location map screen”

(page 6-14)

Editing/deleting destination or

waypoint

A destination or waypoint that has al-

ready been set can be modified or deleted.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Edit/Add to Route].

3. Touch a destination or waypoint that

is already set.

6-38

4. Touch the item you would like to set.

Available settings

.[Delete]:

A selected destination or waypoint

that has already been set can be

deleted.

.[Change Order]:

The order of a destination and

waypoints that are already set can

be changed.

.[Move Dest.]:

The location of the destination or

waypoint can be adjusted by mov-

ing the cross pointer across the

map on the touch screen display.

5. Touch [Calculate] to apply the change.

INFO:

If the destination is deleted, the final

waypoint of the route becomes the desti-

nation.

Changing route calculation con-

ditions

Each section of the route between way-

points can have different route calcula-

tion conditions.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Edit/Add to Route].

3. Touch the route condition shown on

the preferred section of the route to

the destination or waypoint.

4. Touch the preferred condition.

“Route Settings” (page 6-44)

5. The conditions are changed and the

display returns to the edit route

screen.

6. Touch [Calculate] to apply the change.

INFO:

.The recalculated route may not be the

shortest route because the system

prioritizes roads that are easy to drive

on for safety reasons.

Changing order of destination

and waypoints

The order of a destination and waypoints

that are already set can be changed.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Edit/Add to Route].

3. Touch a destination or waypoint that

is already set.

4. Touch [Change Order].

5. Touch a preferred destination or way-

point to replace the previously se-

lected destination or waypoint.

6. Navigation

6-39

6. Navigation

6. Touch [Calculate] to apply the change.

RECALCULATING ROUTE

A route can be manually searched again

after changing the search conditions, etc.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Recalculate]. A message is

displayed and the route is recalcu-

lated.

3. Touch [Start] or conduct other opera-

tions as necessary.

“Options before starting the route

guidance” (page 6-26)

INFO:

.When a waypoint has been set on the

route, the system will search for only

one route, even if route recalculation is

performed.

.When the vehicle deviates from the

suggested route, the route from the

current location to the destination is

automatically searched again by the

Auto Reroute function.

“Route Settings” (page 6-44)

SEARCHING FOR DETOUR ROUTE

USING TRAFFIC INFORMATION (for

U.S. and Canada)

When a serious traffic event occurs on the

route, or if the system finds a faster route,

a detour alert will display automatically. If

the automatic alert is not noticed, a

detour can also be searched for manually.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Traffic Detour].

3. When the detour search is successful,

detailed information about the detour

route and the comparison screen of

the two routes are displayed.

Original route (blue)

Detour route (purple)

The change of distance and esti-

mated travel time to destination

when the detour route is taken.

4. To accept the suggested detour route,

touch [Yes].

INFO:

.Without a subscription to SiriusXM

Traffic, it will not be possible to receive

traffic detour information or apply

settings for functions related to traffic

information. A message appears when

a related menu item is selected.

“Notes on SiriusXM Traffic infor-

mation” (page 5-19)

.If no route is set, or [Use Real Time

Traffic Information] is turned off, this

function cannot be operated.

“Route Settings” (page 6-44)

.If a detour route is not selected and no

further action is performed, the detour

route will be automatically canceled.

.The detour suggestion can be re-

trieved even after the message dis-

appears by manually selecting [Traffic

Detour]. The system will then search

for the detour again and will suggest a

detour if one is available at that time.

6-40

Automatic detour guidance

When [Auto Reroute] and [Use Real Time

Traffic Information] are turned on in the

detailed route settings, a message will be

displayed automatically when the system

finds a detour.

“Route Settings” (page 6-44)

To accept the suggested detour route,

touch [Yes].

INFO:

.If no operation is performed for 1

minute after the message is displayed,

the message disappears. The detour

will not be accepted, and the current

suggested route will remain un-

changed.

.When [Traffic Announcements] is

turned on in the guidance settings,

the system will announce voice gui-

dance at the same time the message

appears on the screen.

“Guidance settings” (page 6-42)

SETTING DETOUR ROUTE

To detour from the suggested route, a

route detouring for a specified distance

can be calculated.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Detour].

3. Touch a detour distance select from

1/2 mile (1km), 1 mile (2km), 3 miles

(5km) or 5 miles (10km). After calculat-

ing the detour, the system displays the

detour route on the map.

INFO:

.When the vehicle has deviated from

the suggested route, [Detour] cannot

be selected.

.If the system cannot calculate a de-

tour with the specified conditions the

previous suggested route is displayed.

.If the vehicle is traveling very fast, the

detour route may start from a location

that the vehicle has already passed.

ROUTE GUIDANCE SETTINGS

The route search conditions and route

guidance can be set.

6. Navigation

6-41

6. Navigation

Guidance settings

Various guidance information can be set to be played during route guidance and the route and/or voice guidance can be activated or

deactivated.

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Navigation] and touch [Guidance Settings].

3. Touch an item you would like to set.

Setting item Action

[Guidance Volume] Adjusts the volume level of voice guidance.

[Guidance Voice] Activates or deactivates voice guidance.

[Traffic Announcement] (for U.S. and Canada) Activates/deactivates the traffic announcement.

When this item is activated, the system provides an announcement of a traffic

information event on the route. The indicator illuminates if traffic announcement is

activated.

[Intersection Guidance

Settings]

[Tones Only] When this item is turned on, a tone will sound at the timing of [At Turing Point], [Near

Guidance] and [Basic Guidance].

[1 Voice Guide] When this item is turned on, a tone will sound at the timing of [At Turning Point] and

[Near Guidance], and the voice guidance will be announced at the timing of [Basic

Guidance].

[2 Voice Guide] When this item is turned on, a tone will sound at the timing of [At Turning Point], and

the voice guidance will be announced at the timing of [Near Guidance] and [Basic

Guidance].

[3 Voice Guide] When this item is turned on, a tone will sound at the timing of [At Turning Point], and

the voice guidance will be announced at the timing of [Near Guidance], [Basic

Guidance] and [Far Guidance].

[Estimated Time] [Destination] Displays

and the travel time to the destination on the map screen.

[Waypoint] Displays and the travel time to the waypoint on the map screen.

6-42

INFO:

.The guidance volume can also be adjusted by turning <VOL/ >,<VOLUME/ > or pushing + or - side of < > on the steering

wheel while voice guidance is being announced.

.A SiriusXM Traffic subscription is necessary to use Traffic Announcement function (for U.S. and Canada).

6. Navigation

6-43

6. Navigation

Route Settings

It is possible to set the conditions of the route search.

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Navigation] and touch [Route Settings].

3. Touch the item you would like to set.

For U.S. and Canada

Setting Item Action

[Basic Route Type] [Fastest Route] Prioritizes the use of freeways.

[Minimize Freeway] Minimizes the use of freeways.

[Shortest Distance] Prioritizes the shortest route.

The recalculated route may not be the shortest route

because the system prioritizes roads that are easy to drive

on for safety reasons.

[Other Routing

Choices]

[Minimize Toll Roads] Minimizes the use of toll roads.

[Time Restricted Rd] [Use Restriction Info] Calculates route taking time restriction information into

consideration.

[Do Not Use Restriction Info] Calculates route without taking time restriction informa-

tion into consideration.

[Avoid] Calculates route avoiding the use of time restricted roads.

[Use Real Time Traffic Information] Uses the latest traffic information received via the

SiriusXM Traffic broadcast.

“Searching for detour route using traffic information

(for U.S. and Canada)” (page 6-40)

[Use Avoid Area Settings] Enables the avoid area setting.

[Use Ferries] Includes the use of ferries.

6-44

Setting Item Action

[Use Learned Routes] Uses the roads that are most frequently traveled with the

help of self-learning technology.

[Use HOV Lanes] Uses the HOV lanes.

[Auto Reroute] If the vehicle deviates from the suggested route, the

system automatically recalculates a route that leads the

vehicle to the suggested route.

INFO:

.If the vehicle greatly deviates from the suggested route, the system calculates a new route.

.Traffic jam information displayed on the map screen is not statistical traffic information.

.If [Do Not Use Restriction Info] is selected for [Time Restricted Rd] setting, the system calculates a route without any consideration

of the regulations concerning the time or day of the week. Therefore, the suggested route may include a road subject to traffic

regulations concerning the time or day of the week. When driving along the route, always follow all traffic regulations regardless of

whether [Time Restricted Rd] is set to be considered or not.

.Even when [Use Real Time Traffic Information] is turned on, if traffic information has not been provided for the area, a detour may

not always be indicated in a location where a traffic jam occurs.

.The system calculates to reduce the time required for the entire route from the start to the destination. If there are no appropriate

routes, the system may lead to a route where a traffic jam occurs instead of leading to a detour.

.The system may not lead to a detour if traffic closure or a traffic jam occurs far from the present location.

6. Navigation

6-45

6. Navigation

For Mexico

Setting Item Action

[Basic Route Type] [Fastest Route] Prioritizes the use of freeways.

[Minimize Freeway] Minimizes the use of freeways.

[Shortest Distance] Prioritizes the shortest route.

The recalculated route may not be the shortest route

because the system prioritizes roads that are easy to drive

on for safety reasons.

[Other Routing

Choices]

[Minimize Toll Roads] Minimizes the use of toll roads.

[Time Restricted Rd] Turns the time restriction information on/off.

[Use Avoid Area Settings] Enables the avoid area setting.

[Use Ferries] Includes the use of ferries.

[Auto Reroute] If the vehicle deviates from the suggested route, the

system automatically recalculates a route that leads the

vehicle to the suggested route.

INFO:

If the vehicle greatly deviates from the suggested route, the system calculates a new route.

6-46

VIEWING TRAFFIC INFORMA-

TION (for U.S. and Canada)

SiriusXM Traffic information is a subscrip-

tion service offered by SiriusXM Satellite

Radio.

This service provides real-time informa-

tion regarding traffic flow, accidents, road

construction and other incidents, where

available.

SiriusXM Traffic combines information

from commercial and public traffic data

providers including government depart-

ments of transportation, police, emer-

gency services, road sensors, cameras

and aircraft reports. The traffic informa-

tion is broadcast to the vehicle by the

SiriusXM satellites. Available traffic infor-

mation on the route the driver selected is

shown on the navigation screen so traffic

conditions between you and the destina-

tion are known. Three types of real-time

traffic information for major roadways are

shown on the navigation system:

* Unscheduled traffic data for example,

accidents and disabled vehicles.

* Scheduled traffic data, for example road

construction and road closures.

* Traffic flow information (rate of speed

data).

WARNING

SiriusXM Traffic information is not a

substitute for attentive driving. Traffic

conditions change constantly and

emergency situations can arise with-

out warning. Relying only on SiriusXM

Traffic information may lead to a

collision and could result in serious

personal injury.

NOTE:

.Flow information is provided only for

roads equipped with traffic sensors

and is not available in all markets

covered by the service. Flow data

may not be available on portions of a

road that is under construction.

.A SiriusXM Traffic subscription is

necessary to view Traffic Info.

“SiriusXM Travel Link (for U.S.

and Canada)” (page 5-18)

VIEWING AVAILABLE TRAFFIC IN-

FORMATION

Viewing traffic events from list

1. Touch [Info] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [SXM Traffic]. A list of available

types of information are displayed.

Available

items

Function

[Info on

Route]

Displays a list of traffic infor-

mation found on the route

from the current vehicle loca-

tion to the destination. Avail-

able only when a route is set.

[Nearby

Traffic

Info]

Displays a list of available

traffic information around the

current vehicle location.

3. Touch the preferred information. A list

of available events are displayed.

6. Navigation

6-47

6. Navigation

4. Touch a preferred events from the list

to check the detailed information and

the map.

Displaying urgent traffic informa-

tion

When an urgent event is found around the

current vehicle location, a message pops

up automatically on the touch screen

display with a voice announcement.

The message includes the icon, event

type, event information and the direct

distance from the current location to the

event.

INFO:

.Urgent traffic information is displayed

regardless of whether [Use Traffic Info]

function is on or off.

“Traffic information setting”

(page 6-49)

.When there are multiple urgent events,

the event with the shortest direct

distance from the current location is

displayed.

.If the urgent event is on the recom-

mended route, and if a detour is found,

the detour route notification screen is

displayed when the vehicle ap-

proaches the detour point.

Traffic information on map

With a subscription to SiriusXM Traffic

service, traffic information is displayed

on both 2D map and Birdview™ map

screen.

“Notes on SiriusXM Traffic informa-

tion” (page 5-19)

Screen information

Road conditions

Free Flow: Green arrow

Moderate traffic: Yellow arrow

Heavy traffic: Red arrow

Section affected by serious traffic

event: Purple arrow

Traffic information icon:

If a route is not already set, all of the

traffic information icons on the map

screen are displayed in color. When a

route is already set, the icons on the

route are displayed in color, and the

icons outside the route are displayed

in gray.

: Accident

: Closed road

: Information

: Road work

: Slippery road

: Weather

: Incident

Traffic indicator:

Displays the reception condition of

traffic information transmitted from

the provider.

When reception condition of traffic

information transmitted from the

provider is not detected, the traffic

indicator will be “grayed-out”.

6-48

Remaining distance and estimated

time to the destination calculated

with consideration of traffic infor-

mation on route.

INFO:

Traffic icons are displayed in the scale

level of 1/64 miles (25 m) - 5 miles (10 km)

range. Some traffic icons are displayed

only on the map at higher detail levels.

TRAFFIC INFORMATION SETTING

Settings for the traffic information related

functions can be changed.

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Navigation].

3. Touch [Traffic Info Setting].

4. Touch the preferred setting. The in-

dicator for the selected setting illumi-

nates.

Available setting items

.[Use Traffic Info]:

Enables all traffic information related

functions.

.[Show Incidents on Map]:

Displays the traffic incidents (e.g., ac-

cident) on the map screen.

.[Show Traffic Flow on Map]:

Displays the traffic flow with an arrow

on the map screen.

.[Traffic Announcement]:

Announces the traffic information

event on the route.

INFO:

.Even when [Show Traffic Flow on Map]

and [Show Incidents on Map] are set to

off, the list display of [Info on Route]

and [Nearby Traffic Info] will not be

affected.

“Viewing traffic events from list”

(page 6-47)

.Even when [Traffic Announcement] is

set to off, the route guidance will not

be affected. Also, the announcement

of emergency information and weath-

er information will not be turned off.

Voice command

1. Push <>/< > located on the

steering wheel.

2. After the tone sounds, speak a com-

mand.

Use the following voice command to

turn the traffic information system on/

off:

“Traffic Information”

6. Navigation

6-49

6. Navigation

STORING A LOCATION/ROUTE

STORING LOCATION

Often visited locations can be stored in

the Stored Locations. The stored ad-

dresses can be easily retrieved to set

them as a destination or waypoint. The

Stored Locations can store up to 200

locations.

Storing home location

A home location can be stored in the

system.

This operation is not available when a

destination is set for route guidance.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Home].

3. If a home location is not registered, the

system asks if you wish to store it.

Touch [Yes] to continue with the stor-

ing operation.

4. Set the Home location using the same

procedure as setting a destination.

“Setting destination” (page 6-14)

5. The selected location is displayed on

the map screen as a home icon. Edit

the contents of the stored item as

necessary and touch [OK].

“Editing stored home and loca-

tion” (page 6-53)

Other Settings

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Navigation] and touch [Ad-

dress Book].

3. Touch [Home Location (None)].

4. Touch an appropriate method to set a

location. Refer to the search methods

used for destination setting.

“Setting destination” (page 6-14)

When stored, the location is displayed

at the center of the map on the touch

screen display.

5. Edit the contents of the stored item as

necessary and touch [OK].

“Editing stored home and loca-

tion” (page 6-53)

Storing location by searching

It is possible to store a location by

searching in various ways.

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Navigation].

3. Touch [Address Book].

4. Touch [Stored Locations].

5. Touch [Add New].

6. Touch an appropriate method to set a

location. Refer to the search methods

used for destination setting.

“Setting destination” (page 6-14)

7. A message is displayed, and the ad-

dress of the location is stored in the

Address Book.

8. Adjust and edit the contents of the

stored item as necessary. Touch [OK]

to confirm.

“Editing stored home and loca-

tion” (page 6-53)

6-50

INFO:

.When the location is stored in the

Stored Locations, [Address Book] can

be used to search for the location.

“Searching from address book”

(page 6-21)

.When 200 locations are already stored,

a new location cannot be stored until a

currently stored location is deleted.

Storing location by moving map

1. Move to the preferred location on the

map and touch [ ] on the touch

screen display.

2. Touch [Save Location]. A message is

displayed.

3. The icon representing the stored loca-

tion is displayed on the map. Push

<MAP> to return to the current loca-

tion map screen.

STORING ROUTE

A maximum of 5 calculated routes can be

stored. Stored routes can be easily re-

trieved and set as the suggested route.

If any waypoints are not set on the route,

the route cannot be stored.

1. Touch [Navi] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Route Info].

3. Touch [Store Route]. A confirmation

message is displayed. Select [Yes] to

store the current route.

Other settings

A route can also be stored using the

following procedure.

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Navigation].

3. Touch [Address Book].

4. Touch [Stored Routes].

5. Touch [Store Current Route]. A con-

firmation message is displayed.

6. Confirm the contents of the message

and touch [Yes]. The current route is

stored.

INFO:

.At least 1 waypoint must be set for the

route to be stored.

.A stored route includes only locations

(destination and waypoints) and route

calculation conditions, not the route

itself.

.The route is stored in the first available

position number in the store current

route list.

.When 5 routes are already stored in

the address book, a new route cannot

be stored until a route is deleted.

“Deleting stored item” (page 6-55)

STORING AVOID AREA

An Avoid Area can be stored. The Avoid

Area is an area that can be excluded from

a route, such as a road that is always

congested. Once Avoid Areas are stored,

the system avoids those areas when

calculating a route. Up to 10 Avoid Areas

can be stored.

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Navigation].

3. Touch [Address Book].

4. Touch [Avoid Area].

6. Navigation

6-51

6. Navigation

5. Touch [Add New].

Touch an appropriate method to

search for a location.

“Setting destination” (page 6-14)

6. Adjust the information of the Avoid

Area as necessary.

“Editing avoid area” (page 6-55)

7. Touch [OK] to store the avoid area

information.

INFO:

.A maximum of 10 Avoid Areas can be

stored. When 10 Avoid Areas are al-

ready stored, a new Avoid Area cannot

be stored until a currently stored Avoid

Area is deleted.

“Deleting stored item” (page 6-55)

6-52

EDITING STORED INFORMATION

Items stored in the system can be edited.

Editing stored home and location

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Navigation] and touch [Address Book].

Setting item Action

[Home Location]* [Edit] [Show Icon on Map] Displays the home icon on the map.

[Icon] Selects a home icon of a preferred design.

[Sound] Sets the type of the alarm that sounds when the

vehicle approaches home.

[Direction] Sets the alarm to sound when approaching from a

specific direction.

[Distance] Sets the alarm to sound when reaching a specific

distance to home.

[Phone No.] Stores the home telephone number.

[Move Location] Adjusts the stored home location.

[Delete] Deletes the stored home location.

[OK] Confirms and saves the edited home information.

[Stored Locations] [Sort] [Sorted By Number] Sorts the stored locations.

“Searching from address book” (page 6-21)

[Sorted By Name]

[Sorted By Icon]

[Sorted By Group]

[Add New] Adds a new location.

“Storing location by searching” (page 6-50)

6. Navigation

6-53

6. Navigation

Setting item Action

Stored Location

List

[Edit] [Show Icon on Map] Displays the icon of a stored location on the map.

[Name] Registers a name of the entry.

[Voicetag] Registers a voicetag for the entry which allows the

entry to be used with the voice recognition system.

[Icon] Selects an icon for the entry.

[Sound] Sets the type of the alarm that sounds when the

vehicle approaches the location.

[Direction] Sets the alarm to sound when approaching from a

specific direction.

[Distance] Sets the alarm to sound when reaching a specific

distance to the location.

[Phone No.] Registers a phone number of the location.

[Group] Registers a group of the entry.

[Entry Number] Registers an entry number for the location.

[Move Location] Adjusts the stored location information.

[Delete] Deletes the stored location information.

[OK] Confirms and saves the edited stored location

information.

*: When home location has not been stored, [Home Location (None)] is displayed and a home location can be stored from the menu.

6-54

Editing stored route

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Navigation] and touch [Ad-

dress Book].

3. Touch [Stored Routes].

4. Touch the preferred stored route from

the list.

Setting item Action

[Rename] Changes the stored route

name.

[Replace] Overwrites the stored

tracked route to the cur-

rent tracked route.

[Delete] Deletes the stored route.

[OK] Applies the edited settings.

Editing avoid area

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar

and touch [Navigation].

2. Touch [Address Book] and then touch

[Avoid Area].

3. Touch a preferred Avoid Area from the

list. Avoid Area editing screen will be

displayed.

Setting item Action

[Rename] Changes the name of an

Avoid Area.

[Move Loca-

tion]

Display the Avoid Area on

the touch screen display,

and adjusts the location of

the Avoid Area.

[Resize Area] Adjusts the range of the

Avoid Area.

[FWY] Sets the route to include or

not include freeways.

On the map, the Avoid Area

will be displayed in green if

it includes a freeway or in

blue if it does not include a

freeway.

[Delete] Delete an Avoid Area.

[OK] Applies the edited setting.

DELETING STORED ITEM

The locations and routes in the Address

Book can be deleted. Two deletion meth-

ods are available: deleting an individual

item and deleting all stored items.

INFO:

.Deleted items cannot be restored.

Before deleting an item, always make

sure that the item is no longer needed.

6. Navigation

6-55

6. Navigation

Deleting stored item individually

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Navigation] and touch [Address Book].

3. Touch [Delete Stored Items].

Select the preferred item and touch [Yes] to complete the deleting operation.

Step 1 Step2 Action

[Delete Home Location] Deletes home location.

[Delete Ad-

dress Book]

[Delete All] Deletes all stored locations.

[Delete One] Deletes a selected stored location.

[Delete

Stored

Routes]

[Delete All] Deletes all stored routes.

[Delete One] Deletes selected stored routes.

[Delete Avoid

Areas]

[Delete All] Deletes all Avoid Areas.

[Delete One] Deletes a selected Avoid Area.

[Delete Pre-

vious Desti-

nations]

[Delete All Previous Destina-

tions]

Deletes all of the previous destinations.

[Delete Previous Destination] Deletes a selected previous destination.

[Delete Previous Start Point] Deletes a previous start point.

[Delete Learned Routes] (for U.S. and Canada) Deletes all system learned routes.

Deleting individual item on map

1. Align the cross pointer over the pre-

ferred stored location for deletion by

moving on the map, and then touch

[].

2. Touch [Delete].

3. A confirmation message is displayed.

Confirm the contents of the message

and touch [Yes].

The stored item is deleted from the

Address Book.

TRANSFERRING INFORMATION

TO/FROM ADDRESS BOOK

The information of the stored home and

addresses can be exported and imported

using a USB memory device.

“USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connec-

tion Port and AUX (auxiliary) input

jack” (page 2-12)

6-56

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Navigation].

3. Touch [Address Book].

4. Touch [Transfer Address Book].

5. Touch [Export] or [Import].

6. Touch [Home Location] or [Stored

Locations].

7. Touch [Download].

NOTE:

Do not remove the USB memory device

until the system completely imports or

exports the data.

INFO:

.If the USB memory device already has

the data for a stored address, a con-

firmation message will be displayed.

Once overwritten, the original data

cannot be recovered.

.A USB memory device can be used to

transfer data but it is not possible to

edit the data using a personal compu-

ter, etc.

.Models with two USB connection

ports:

Either of the two USB connection ports

can be used for information transfer.

6. Navigation

6-57

6. Navigation

NAVIGATION SETTINGS

The navigation system can be customized according to the user’s preference.

Available items may vary depending on models and specifications.

1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Navigation].

3. Touch the item you would like to set.

Available items:

[Address Book]

Stores locations and routes. Stored items can be edited.

“Storing a location/route” (page 6-50)

[Map View]

Sets the display method and direction of the map.

“Map view settings” (page 6-9)

[Map Icons]

Sets the map icons to appear on the map.

“Displaying map icons” (page 6-12)

[Guidance Settings]

Sets the various functions for route guidance.

“Guidance settings” (page 6-42)

[Route Settings]

Changes the routing preferences.

“Route Settings” (page 6-44)

[Traffic Info Setting] (for U.S. and Canada)

Sets the various functions of the SiriusXM Traffic information system.

“Traffic information setting” (page 6-49)

6-58

[Speed Limit Indication on Map] (for U.S. and Canada)

Turns on/off the speed limit display function. When this item is turned on, speed limit indicator will appear on the map screen when

available.

[Others]

Setting item Action

[Audio Display on Map] Turns the audio information display on the map screen on/off.

[Small Step Zoom With Dial] (if so equipped) Sets the free zoom function on/off. When this setting is on, it is possible to adjust the

scale in smaller steps than with normal scale adjustment.

[Map Scrolling Informa-

tion]

[Address Book Icons] Information about the location, on which the center of the cross pointer is placed by

scrolling on the map, can be set to be displayed.

“Displaying map scrolling information” (page 6-12)

[Destination/Waypoint

Icons]

[Show pop-up for POIs]

[Latitude/Longitude Info]

[Customize Nearby POIs] Item 1 - Item 5 Customizes the nearby categories to show the categories that you frequently use.

[Reset] Resets the nearby categories to default.

[Keyboard Type] [QWERTY] The keyboard layout of the character input screens can be selected.

[ABC]

[Tracking Dots Displayed

on Map]

[Show Tracking Dots on

Map]

Turns the route tracking dots display on/off.

[Dist. Between Tracking

Dots]

Select tracking dot interval.

[Delete Track to Current

Location]

Deletes the route tracking dots up to the current location.

6. Navigation

6-59

6. Navigation

Setting item Action

[Adjust Current Location] If the vehicle icon indicating the current vehicle location is not in the correct

position, the location of the vehicle icon on the map screen can be adjusted.

[Delete Stored Items]

Deletes a stored location or route.

“Deleting stored item individually” (page 6-56)

[Delete Previous Destinations]

Deletes all or one of the previous destinations or a previous start point.

“Deleting stored item individually” (page 6-56)

[Reset All Navigation Settings to Default]

This resets various settings (display, volume level, etc.) to the default settings.

6-60

GENERAL INFORMATION FOR

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

CURRENT VEHICLE LOCATION

Display of current vehicle location

This navigation system combines the data

obtained from the vehicle (by gyro sensor)

and from GPS (Global Positioning System)

satellites to calculate the current location

of the vehicle. This position is then dis-

played throughout route guidance to a

destination.

What is GPS (Global Positioning

System)?

GPS is a position detecting system that

uses satellites deployed by the U.S. gov-

ernment. This navigation system receives

radio signals from three or more different

satellites that orbit 13,049 miles (21,000

km) above the earth in space, and detect

the position of the vehicle by utilizing the

principle of triangulation.

Positioning adjustment:

When the system judges that the vehicle

position is not accurate based on vehicle

speed and gyro sensor data calculations,

the system will automatically adjust the

position of the vehicle icon using GPS

signals.

Receiving signals from GPS satellites:

The reception of GPS signals can be weak,

depending on the environment. Vehicles

in the following areas/environments may

not receive GPS signals.

*Inside tunnels or parking garages

*In areas with numerous tall buildings

*Under multi-layered highways

6. Navigation

6-61

6. Navigation

*Areas with numerous tall trees

*In a canyon

INFO:

The GPS antenna is located on the instru-

ment panel inside the vehicle. Do not

place any objects, especially cellular

phones or transceivers, on the instrument

panel. Because the strength of the GPS

signal is approximately one billionth of

that of TV waves, phones and transceivers

will affect or may totally disrupt the signal.

Incorrect display of vehicle posi-

tion

The following cases may affect the display

accuracy of the vehicle’s position or tra-

veling direction. The accuracy will return

to normal if the driving conditions return

to normal.

*When there is a similar road nearby.

*When the vehicle is traveling in an

area with a grid pattern road system.

*When the vehicle is passing through a

large Y-shaped intersection/junction.

6-62

*When the vehicle is traveling on a

continuous, slowly curving road.

*When the vehicle is traveling on a road

with repeating S-shaped curves.

*When the vehicle is on a loop bridge.

*When the vehicle is on a snow-cov-

ered or unpaved road.

*When repeatedly turning left or right,

or driving in zigzags.

*When the vehicle is rotated on a

parking lot turntable while the igni-

tion switch placed in the OFF position.

6. Navigation

6-63

6. Navigation

*When driving on a road not displayed

on the map screen or a road that has

been changed due to additional con-

struction or other reasons.

*When the GPS positioning accuracy is

low.

INFO:

.The vehicle icon may be misaligned

when starting the vehicle just after

starting the engine or the hybrid

system.

.The vehicle icon may also be misa-

ligned if different sized tires or tire

chains are installed.

.The system has a function that auto-

matically corrects the vehicle icon

position when it is misaligned from

the actual position.

.Vehicle position correction by GPS

may not function when the vehicle is

stopped.

.If the vehicle icon position does not

return to normal even after driving for

a while, correct the vehicle icon posi-

tion manually.

Detailed Map Coverage Areas

(MCA) for navigation system

This system is designed to help guiding to

the destination, and it also performs other

functions as outlined in this manual.

However, the system must be used safely

and properly. Information concerning

road conditions, traffic signs and the

availability of services may not always be

up-to-date. The system is not a substitute

for safe, proper and legal driving.

Map data covers select metropolitan

areas.

Map data includes two types of areas:

“Detailed coverage areas” providing all

detailed road data and other areas show-

ing “Main roads only”.

INFO:

Detailed map data is not available in many

areas and is generally limited to select

major metropolitan areas.

When gray/dark green road is

displayed on map

.When you are driving on a road

displayed in gray after the vehicle has

deviated from the suggested route

during route guidance, automatic re-

routing may not start immediately.

.The navigation system does not pro-

vide route guidance for roads dis-

played in dark green. Therefore, if the

destination is set on a road displayed

in dark green, the enlarged map dis-

play will return to the ordinary map

screen at some point on a suggested

route that is near the destination. Also,

voice guidance will stop at some point

6-64

on a suggested route that is near the

destination.

.Places information and street names

near roads displayed in gray may not

be contained in the map data.

ROUTE CALCULATION

.There may be cases where carpool

lanes are included on a suggested

route when the automatic rerouting

function is activated, even if the [Time

Restricted Rd] is set to [Use Restriction

Info] or [Avoid] (for U.S. and Canada).

“Route Settings” (page 6-44)

.The navigation system does not pro-

vide route guidance for roads dis-

played in dark green.

.If the destination is set on a dark green

road, the enlarged map display will

switch to the ordinary map screen at

some point and suggest a route that is

near the destination. The distance and

direction to the endpoint of the sug-

gested route will be displayed in the

lower right corner of the screen. Also,

at this time, voice guidance will an-

nounce, “The route to your destination

includes roads through incomplete

map areas. Voice guidance will not be

provided in these areas.”

When approaching the endpoint of the

suggested route, voice guidance will

announce, “Entering the road with

incomplete map data. Please use the

direction arrow and distance informa-

tion to proceed to your destination.”

To reach the destination, refer to the

map screen. Always follow actual

roads and regulations and drive safely.

.The suggested route may not be the

shortest, nor are other circumstances

such as traffic jams considered.

.Because of the inevitable difference in

road conditions and circumstances

between the time you use this system

and the time the information was

produced for the map data, there

may be discrepancies in roads and

regulations. In such cases, actual road

conditions and regulations take pre-

cedence over map data information.

.During route calculation, the map will

not scroll, however the vehicle icon will

move according to the actual vehicle’s

movement.

.During route calculation, buttons such

as <MAP> and <MENU> will be dis-

abled.

.In some cases, after the calculation is

complete, the calculated route may

not be immediately displayed.

.Waypoints that have been passed will

be disregarded by rerouting calcula-

tion.

.If you scroll the map while the sug-

gested route is being drawn, it may

take more time to finish drawing.

.Route calculation may not be com-

pleted in the following cases.

— If there is no main road within a

range of 1.5 miles (2.5 km) from the

vehicle, a message saying so will

appear on the screen. Try recalcu-

lating when the vehicle is closer to a

main road.

— If there is no main road within a

range of 1.5 miles (2.5 km) from the

destination or waypoint, a message

saying so will appear on the screen.

Try setting the location closer to a

main road.

— If the vehicle is too close to the

destination or if there are no roads

to the destination, a message say-

ing so will appear on the screen.

— If it is impossible to reach the

destination or waypoints because

of traffic regulations, etc.

— If the only route to reach the desti-

nation or waypoints is extremely

6. Navigation

6-65

6. Navigation

complicated.

.The following may occur when the

route is displayed.

— If you calculate a route on a main

road, the starting point of the route

may not exactly match the current

vehicle location.

— The endpoint of the route may not

exactly match the destination.

— If you calculate a route on a main

road, the system may display a

route from another main road. This

may be because the position of the

vehicle icon is not accurate. In this

case, park the vehicle in a safe

location and reset the vehicle icon,

or continue driving to see if the

position of the vehicle icon is auto-

matically adjusted before recalcu-

lating the route.

— There are cases in which the system

shows an indirect route to reach

the destination or waypoints, if you

set them from stored or facility

information. In order to correct this,

you must be careful about the

traffic direction, especially when

lanes with different travel directions

are shown separately, such as inter-

changes and service areas.

— This system makes no distinction

between limited traffic control and

total control (blockage). It may

show an indirect route even if the

road is usable.

— Even if the ferry preference is set to

OFF, a route that uses a ferry line

may be suggested.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

INFO:

.For U.S. and Canada:

The system will announce street

names when the system language is

set to English. Street names are not

announced when the system is set to

French/Spanish.

.For Mexico:

The system will announce street

names when the system language is

set to Spanish. Street names are not

announced when the system is set to

English/French.

Repeating voice guidance

This function is available throughout

route guidance, from the time after the

route calculation is completed until the

vehicle arrives at the destination. Push

and hold the <MAP>. Voice guidance will

be repeated.

INFO:

If <MAP> is pushed and held when the

vehicle is going in the wrong direction,

voice guidance will announce: “Please

make a legal U-turn if possible.”

Notes on voice guidance

.Voice guidance in this system should

be regarded as a supplementary func-

tion. When driving the vehicle, check

the route on the map and follow the

actual roads and traffic regulations.

.Voice guidance is activated only for

intersections with certain conditions.

There may be cases where the vehicle

has to turn, but voice guidance is not

provided.

.Voice guidance contents may vary,

depending on the direction of the turn

and the type of intersection.

6-66

.The voice guidance timing will vary

depending on the situation.

.When the vehicle has deviated from

the suggested route, voice guidance is

not available. The system will not

announce this. Refer to the map and

recalculate the route.

“Recalculating route” (page 6-40)

.Voice guidance may not accurately

correspond with road numbers and

directions at freeway junctions.

.Voice guidance may not accurately

correspond to street names at free-

way exits.

.The displayed street names may

sometimes differ from the actual

names.

.Voice guidance is not available when

the [Guidance Voice] is turned off.

“Volume and Beeps settings”

(page 2-24)

.Voice guidance will start when the

vehicle enters the suggested route.

Refer to the map for directions to the

starting point of the route.

.When approaching a waypoint, voice

guidance will announce, “You have

arrived at waypoint 1 (2, 3, 4,...).” Voice

guidance will switch to the next sec-

tion of the route. When voice guidance

is not available, refer to the map for

directions.

.In some cases, voice guidance ends

before arrival at the destination. Refer

to the destination icon on the map to

reach the destination.

.If the system recognizes on which side

the destination (waypoint) is located,

voice guidance will announce “on the

right/left” after announcing the arrival

at the destination.

.Voice guidance may be partially op-

erational or inoperative due to the

angle of roads at an intersection.

.For U.S. and Canada:

Because freeway lane information is

available only for approximately 7,000

major freeways in North America, it is

not possible to display information for

all junctions and exits.

.Freeway exit information may differ

from the information on the actual exit

signs.

.Because it is not possible to consider

data concerning roads that are sea-

sonally available or unavailable, a

route may be displayed that does not

match the actual traffic restrictions. Be

sure to follow the actual traffic restric-

tions while driving.

.For U.S. and Canada:

Canada and Alaska contain many

roads with incomplete map data. As a

result, when searching for a route, the

route may include roads with incom-

plete data. In regions where road data

is not complete, voice guidance may

stop for long periods of time. Be sure

to follow the actual traffic restrictions

while driving.

MAP DATA

How to handle the Map SD card

An SD card that includes the map data is

inserted. When handling the Map SD card,

please be careful and adhere to the

following instructions:

.An SD card is inserted in the slot. This is

the SDHC card that is exclusively used

for this device. This card includes the

map data. The SDHC card is necessary

to operate the device. Do not remove

this card except when updating the

map data is required.

.Never analyze, modify, delete or for-

mat the map data. Doing so may cause

an improper operation of the device.

6. Navigation

6-67

6. Navigation

.The SDHC card that is exclusively used

for this device does not work properly

if it is inserted in another device.

.The map data cannot be used even if it

is copied to another SDHC card.

.Do not remove the SDHC card contain-

ing map data from the system. Using

the system with the SDHC card con-

taining map data removed will prevent

some functions from operating.

NOTE:

Do not remove the SD card containing

map data that is inserted in the slot.

When this SD card containing map data

is removed the navigation system will

not operate. If the SD card containing

map data is accidentally removed, after

reinserting the SD card containing map

data into the slot, place the ignition

switch in the OFF position and then

place it back in the ON position.

How to order map data updates

For U.S. and Canada

Visit NissanNavigation.com or contact the

NISSAN NAVIGATION SYSTEM HELPDESK

to order updated map data. (See the

contact information on the inside front

cover of this manual.)

For Mexico

To order updated map data, contact a

NISSAN dealer.

About map data (for U.S. and

Canada)

1. This map data has been prepared by

CLARION CO., LTD. (CLARION), under

license from HERE. has added, pro-

cessed and digitized data based on

the digital road map data of HERE. Due

to the production timing of the map

data, some new roads may not be

included in this map data or some of

the names or roads may be different

from those at the time you use this

map data.

2. Traffic control and regulation data

used in this map data may be different

from those at the time you use this

map data due to the data production

timing. When driving your vehicle, fol-

low the actual traffic control signs and

notices on the roads.

3. Reproducing or copying this map soft-

ware is strictly prohibited by law.

Published by Nissan North America, Inc.

served.

Certain business data provided by In-

WARNING

.This navigation system should not

be used as a substitute for your

own judgement. Any route sug-

gestions made by this navigation

system may never override any

local traffic regulations, your own

judgement, and/or knowledge of

safe driving practices. Disregard

route suggestions by the naviga-

tion system if such suggestions

would: cause you to perform an

hazardous or illegal maneuver,

place you in an hazardous situa-

tion, or route you into an area you

consider unsafe.

.The advice provided by the navi-

gation system is to be regarded

only as a suggestion. There may be

situations where the navigation

system displays the vehicle’s loca-

tion incorrectly, fails to suggest

the shortest course, and/or fails

to direct you to your desired desti-

nation. In such situations, rely on

your own driving judgement, tak-

ing into account current driving

conditions.

6-68

.Do not use the navigation system

to route you to emergency ser-

vices. The database does not con-

tain a complete listing of locations

of emergency service providers

such as police, fire stations, hospi-

tals and clinics. Please use your

judgement and your ability to ask

for directions in these situations.

.As the driver you solely are re-

sponsible for your driving safety.

— In order to avoid traffic acci-

dents, do not operate the sys-

tem while driving.

— In order to avoid traffic acci-

dents, operate the system only

when the vehicle is stopped at a

safe place and the parking brake

is set.

— In order to avoid traffic accidents

or traffic offence, remember that

actual road conditions and traf-

fic regulations take precedence

over the information contained

on the navigation system.

— Accordingly, the Software may

contain inaccurate or incom-

plete information due the pas-

sage of time, changing

circumstances, and due to the

nature of the sources used.

Please observe the actual traffic

circumstances and regulations

at all times while driving.

— In a situation when actual road

conditions and traffic regula-

tions differ from the information

contained on the navigation sys-

tem, then abide by traffic rules.

— The navigation system does not

provide, or account for in any

way, information regarding traf-

fic and road laws; speed restric-

tions; road conditions including

road slope, grade, and/or sur-

face conditions; obstruction in-

formation including bridge and

tunnel height and width, and/or

other prevailing driving and/or

road conditions. Always rely on

your own driving judgment, tak-

ing into account current driving

conditions.

— Minimize the amount of time

spent viewing the screen while

driving.

The marks of companies displayed by this

product to indicate business locations are

the marks of their respective owners. The

use of such marks in this product does not

imply any sponsorship, approval, or en-

dorsement by such companies of this

product.

About map data (for Mexico)

1. This map data has been prepared by

CLARION CO., LTD. (CLARION), under

license from HERE. has added, pro-

cessed and digitized data based on

the digital road map data of HERE. Due

to the production timing of the map

data, some new roads may not be

included in this map data or some of

the names or roads may be different

from those at the time you use this

map data.

2. Traffic control and regulation data

used in this map data may be different

from those at the time you use this

map data due to the data production

timing. When driving your vehicle, fol-

low the actual traffic control signs and

notices on the roads.

3. Reproducing or copying this map soft-

ware is strictly prohibited by law.

Published by Clarion Co., Ltd. Manufac-

tured by ZENRIN CO., LTD.

served.

6. Navigation

6-69

6. Navigation

WARNING

.This navigation system should not

be used as a substitute for your

own judgment. Any route sugges-

tions made by this navigation sys-

tem may never override any local

traffic regulations, your own judg-

ment, and/or knowledge of safe

driving practices. Disregard route

suggestions by the navigation sys-

tem if such suggestions would:

cause you to perform an hazar-

dous or illegal maneuver, place

you in an hazardous situation, or

route you into an area you con-

sider unsafe.

.The advice provided by the navi-

gation system is to be regarded

only as a suggestion(s). There may

be situations where the navigation

system displays the vehicle’s loca-

tion incorrectly, fails to suggest

the shortest course, and/or fails

to direct you to your desired desti-

nation. In such situations, rely on

your own driving judgment, taking

into account current driving con-

ditions.

.Do not use the navigation system

to route you to emergency ser-

vices. The database does not con-

tain a complete listing of locations

of emergency service providers

such as police, fire stations, hospi-

tals and clinics. Please use your

judgment and your ability to ask

for directions in these situations.

.As the driver you solely are re-

sponsible for your driving safety.

— In order to avoid traffic acci-

dents, do not operate the sys-

tem while driving.

— In order to avoid traffic acci-

dents, operate the system only

when the vehicle is stopped at a

safe place and the parking brake

is set.

— In order to avoid traffic accidents

or traffic offence, remember that

actual road conditions and traf-

fic regulations take precedence

over the information contained

on the navigation system.

— Accordingly, the Software may

contain inaccurate or incom-

plete information due the pas-

sage of time, changing

circumstances, and due to the

nature of the sources used.

Please observe the actual traffic

circumstances and regulations

at all times while driving.

— In a situation when actual road

conditions and traffic regula-

tions differ from the information

contained on the navigation sys-

tem, then abide by traffic rules.

— The navigation system does not

provide, or account for in any

way, information regarding traf-

fic and road laws; speed restric-

tions; road conditions including

road slope, grade, and/or sur-

face conditions; obstruction in-

formation including bridge and

tunnel height and width, and/or

other prevailing driving and/or

road conditions. Always rely on

your own driving judgment, tak-

ing into account current driving

conditions.

— Minimize the amount of time

spent viewing the screen while

driving.

6-70

End-user terms (for U.S. and Ca-

nada)

The data (“Data”) is provided for your

personal, internal use only and not for

resale. It is protected by copyright, and is

subject to the following terms and condi-

tions which are agreed to by you, on the

one hand, and CLARION CO., LTD. (“CLAR-

ION”) and its licensors (including their

licensors and suppliers) on the other

hand.

This data includes information taken with

permission from Canadian authorities,

Department of Natural Resources Cana-

HERE holds a non-exclusive license from

the United States Postal Service® to pub-

lish and sell ZIP+4® information.

Prices are not established, controlled or

approved by the United States Postal

Service®. The following trademarks and

registrations are owned by the USPS:

United States Postal Service, USPS, and

ZIP+4.

Terms and conditions:

Personal Use Only. You agree to use this

Data together with Nissan Automotive

Products for the solely personal, non-

commercial purposes for which you were

licensed, and not for service bureau, time-

sharing or other similar purposes. Accord-

ingly, but subject to the restrictions set

forth in the following paragraphs, you

agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy,

modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse

engineer any portion of this Data, and may

not transfer or distribute it in any form, for

any purpose, except to the extent per-

mitted by mandatory laws. Multi-disc sets

may only be transferred or sold as a

complete set as provided by CLARION

and not as a subset thereof.

Restrictions.Except where you have been

specifically licensed to do so by CLARION,

and without limiting the preceding para-

graph, you may not (a) use this Data with

any products, systems, or applications

installed or otherwise connected to or in

communication with vehicles, capable of

vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,

real time route guidance, fleet manage-

ment or similar applications; or (b) with or

in communication with any positioning

devices or any mobile or wireless-con-

nected electronic or computer devices,

including without limitation cellular

phones, palmtop and handheld compu-

ters, pagers, and personal digital assis-

tants or PDAs.

Warning.The Data may contain inaccu-

rate or incomplete information due to the

passage of time, changing circumstances,

sources used and the nature of collecting

comprehensive geographic data, any of

which may lead to incorrect results.

No Warranty.This Data is provided to you

“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own

risk. CLARION and its licensors (and their

licensors and suppliers) make no guaran-

tees, representations or warranties of any

kind, express or implied, arising by law or

otherwise, including but not limited to,

content, quality, accuracy, completeness,

effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a parti-

cular purpose, usefulness, use or results to

be obtained from this Data, or that the

Data or server will be uninterrupted or

error-free.

Disclaimer of Warranty: CLARION AND ITS

LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS

AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRAN-

TIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY,

PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FIT-

NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR

NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Terri-

tories and Countries do not allow certain

6. Navigation

6-71

6. Navigation

warranty exclusions, so to that extent the

above exclusion may not apply to you.

Disclaimer of Liability: CLARION AND ITS

LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS

AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO

YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND

OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NAT-

URE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DE-

MAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,

INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIR-

ECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE

OR POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION;

OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,

CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL

OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING

OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO

USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN

THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF

THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER

IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR

BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF CLARION

OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED

OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Some States, Territories and Countries do

not allow certain liability exclusions or

damages limitations, so to that extent

the above may not apply to you.

Export Control. CLARION shall not export

from anywhere any part of the Data or any

direct product thereof except in compli-

ance with, and with all licenses and

approvals required under, applicable ex-

port laws, rules and regulations, including

but not limited to the laws, rules and

regulations administered by the Office of

Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Depart-

ment of Commerce and the Bureau of

Industry and Security of the U.S. Depart-

ment of Commerce. To the extent that

any such export laws, rules or regulations

prohibit NT from complying with any of its

obligations hereunder to deliver or dis-

tribute Data, such failure shall be excused

and shall not constitute a breach of this

Agreement.

Entire Agreement.These terms and con-

ditions constitute the entire agreement

between CLARION (and its licensors, in-

cluding their licensors and suppliers) and

you pertaining to the subject matter here-

of, and supersedes in their entirety any

and all written or oral agreements pre-

viously existing between us with respect

to such subject matter.

Governing Law. The above terms and

conditions shall be governed by the laws

of the State of Illinois, without giving effect

to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii)

the United Nations Convention for Con-

tracts for the International Sale of Goods,

which is explicitly excluded. You agree to

submit to the jurisdiction of the State of

Illinois for any and all disputes, claims and

actions arising from or in connection with

the Data provided to you hereunder.

Government End Users. If the Data is

being acquired by or on behalf of the

United States government or any other

entity seeking or applying rights similar to

those customarily claimed by the United

States government, the Data is a “com-

mercial item” as that term is defined at 48

C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accor-

dance with the End-User Terms under

which this Data was provided, and each

copy of the Data delivered or otherwise

furnished shall be marked and embedded

as appropriate with the following “Notice

of Use,” and shall be treated in accordance

with such Notice:

NOTICE OF USE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLI-

ER) NAME: HERE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLI-

ER) ADDRESS:

c/o Nokia 425 West Randolph Street,

Chicago, Illinois 60606

This Data is a commercial item as defined

in FAR 2.101 and is subject to the End-User

Terms under which this Data was pro-

vided.

If the Contracting Officer, federal govern-

6-72

ment agency, or any federal official re-

fuses to use the legend provided herein,

the Contracting Officer, federal govern-

ment agency, or any federal official must

notify HERE prior to seeking additional or

alternative rights in the Data

End-user terms (for Mexico)

The data (“Data”) is provided for your

personal, internal use only and not for

resale. It is protected by copyright, and is

subject to the following terms and condi-

tions which are agreed to by you, on the

one hand, and CLARION CO., LTD. (“CLAR-

ION”) and its licensors (including their

licensors and suppliers) on the other

hand.

Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Esta-

dística y Geografía.)

Terms and conditions:

Personal Use Only. You agree to use this

Data together with Nissan Automotive

Products for the solely personal, noncom-

mercial purposes for which you were

licensed, and not for service bureau, time-

sharing or other similar purposes. Accord-

ingly, but subject to the restrictions set

forth in the following paragraphs, you

agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy,

modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse

engineer any portion of this Data, and may

not transfer or distribute it in any form, for

any purpose, except to the extent per-

mitted by mandatory laws. Multi-disc sets

may only be transferred or sold as a

complete set as provided by CLARION

and not as a subset thereof.

Restrictions. Except where you have been

specifically licensed to do so by CLARION,

and without limiting the preceding para-

graph, you may not (a) use this Data with

any products, systems, or applications

installed or otherwise connected to or in

communication with vehicles, capable of

vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,

real time route guidance, fleet manage-

ment or similar applications; or (b) with or

in communication with any positioning

devices or any mobile or wireless-con-

nected electronic or computer devices,

including without limitation cellular

phones, palmtop and handheld compu-

ters, pagers, and personal digital assis-

tants or PDAs.

Warning. The Data may contain inaccu-

rate or incomplete information due to the

passage of time, changing circumstances,

sources used and the nature of collecting

comprehensive geographic data, any of

which may lead to incorrect results.

No Warranty. This Data is provided to you

“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own

risk. CLARION and its licensors (and their

licensors and suppliers) make no guaran-

tees, representations or warranties of any

kind, express or implied, arising by law or

otherwise, including but not limited to,

content, quality, accuracy, completeness,

effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a parti-

cular purpose, usefulness, use or results to

be obtained from this Data, or that the

Data or server will be uninterrupted or

error-free.

Disclaimer of Warranty: CLARION AND ITS

LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS

AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRAN-

TIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY,

PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FIT-

NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR

NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Terri-

tories and Countries do not allow certain

6. Navigation

6-73

6. Navigation

warranty exclusions, so to that extent the

above exclusion may not apply to you.

Disclaimer of Liability: CLARION AND ITS

LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS

AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO

YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND

OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NAT-

URE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DE-

MAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,

INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIR-

ECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE

OR POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION;

OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,

CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL

OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING

OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO

USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN

THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF

THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER

IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR

BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF CLARION

OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED

OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Some States, Territories and Countries do

not allow certain liability exclusions or

damages limitations, so to that extent

the above may not apply to you.

Export Control. CLARION shall not export

from anywhere any part of the Data or any

direct product thereof except in compli-

ance with, and with all licenses and

approvals required under, applicable ex-

port laws, rules and regulations, including

but not limited to the laws, rules and

regulations administered by the Office of

Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Depart-

ment of Commerce and the Bureau of

Industry and Security of the U.S. Depart-

ment of Commerce. To the extent that

any such export laws, rules or regulations

prohibit NT from complying with any of its

obligations hereunder to deliver or dis-

tribute Data, such failure shall be excused

and shall not constitute a breach of this

Agreement.

Entire Agreement. These terms and con-

ditions constitute the entire agreement

between CLARION (and its licensors, in-

cluding their licensors and suppliers) and

you pertaining to the subject matter here-

of, and supersedes in their entirety any

and all written or oral agreements pre-

viously existing between us with respect

to such subject matter.

Governing Law. The above terms and

conditions shall be governed by the laws

of the State of Illinois, without giving effect

to (i) its conflict of laws, provisions, or (ii)

the United Nations Convention for Con-

tracts for the International Sale of Goods,

which is explicitly excluded. You agree to

submit to the jurisdiction of the State of

Illinois for any and all disputes, claims and

actions arising from or in connection with

the Data provided to you hereunder.

Government End Users. If the Data is

being acquired by or on behalf of the

United States government or any other

entity seeking or applying rights similar to

those customarily claimed by the United

States government, the Data is a “com-

mercial item” as that term is defined at 48

C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accor-

dance with the End-User Terms under

which this Data was provided, and each

copy of the Data delivered or otherwise

furnished shall be marked and embedded

as appropriate with the following “Notice

of Use,” and shall be treated in accordance

with such Notice:

NOTICE OF USE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLI-

ER) NAME: HERE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLI-

ER) ADDRESS:

c/o Nokia 425 West Randolph Street,

Chicago, Illinois 60606

This Data is a commercial item as defined

in FAR 2.101 and is subject to the End-User

Terms under which this Data was pro-

vided.

If the Contracting Officer, federal govern-

6-74

ment agency, or any federal official re-

fuses to use the legend provided herein,

the Contracting Officer, federal govern-

ment agency, or any federal official must

notify HERE prior to seeking additional or

alternative rights in the Data.

HOW TO HANDLE THE SD CARD

When handling the SD card, please be

careful and adhere to the following in-

structions:

.Always follow the instructions de-

scribed in this manual and in the

handbook attached to the SD card

when using an SD card in this device.

.Do not handle an SD card with wet

hands. Doing so may cause electric

shock or a malfunction.

.Do not allow hands or metal objects to

contact the terminal area of SD cards.

.Do not place SD cards on the instru-

ment panel, on any place with direct

sunlight or in moist circumstances.

Doing so may damage or deform the

SD card.

.Do not use any conventional cleaner,

benzine, thinner or antistatic spray.

.Do not use SD cards in any place

where static electricity or electric noise

adversely affects SD cards. This may

cause data corruption or data loss.

.SD card optimization must not be

performed.

.Always place the SD card in its storage

case when not in use.

.If an SD card is disposed of when it is

not used, it is recommended not only

to delete the stored data but also to

physically break the card.

6. Navigation

6-75

6. Navigation

MEMO

6-76

7 Voice recognition

Voice recognition .......................................................................... 7-2

Using Voice Recognition System ............................... 7-2

Before starting ......................................................................... 7-2

Giving voice commands ................................................. 7-2

Voice recognition settings ........................................ 7-23

7. Voice recognition

VOICE RECOGNITION

USING VOICE RECOGNITION SYS-

TEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is in the ON or

ACC position, Voice Recognition is initia-

lized. When the initialization is complete,

the system is ready to accept voice

commands. If <>/< > on the steering

wheel is pushed before the initialization

completes, the display will show a mes-

sage to wait until the system is ready.

BEFORE STARTING

To get the best recognition performance

from Voice Recognition, observe the fol-

lowing items.

.The interior of the vehicle should be as

quiet as possible. Close the windows

to eliminate the surrounding noises

(traffic noise, vibration sounds, etc.),

which may prevent the system from

correctly recognizing the voice com-

mands.

.Wait until the tone sounds before

speaking a command.

.Speak in a natural conversational

voice without pausing between words.

.The system cannot recognize voice

commands spoken from passenger

seats.

GIVING VOICE COMMANDS

1. Push < >/< > located on the

steering wheel.

2. A list of commands appears on the

screen, and the system provides the

voice menu prompt.

Available category commands are dis-

played on the left side of the screen.

Speak or touch a category command

from the category command list.

INFO:

.Some of the commands for each

category are shown on the right

side of the screen and they can also

be spoken without selecting a ca-

tegory.

.After executing the category com-

mand, only the commands related

to the selected category can be

recognized.

“Command list” (page 7-6)

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on

the screen changes from to ,

speak a command. You can also select

a command by directly touching the

screen or by tilting <>/< > up or

down and pushing <OK>/<ENTER> on

the steering wheel.

INFO:

The Voice Recognition system will

pause its operation when no com-

mand is given after three prompts. To

resume the operation, push

<>/< > on the steering wheel.

4. Continue to follow the voice menu

prompts and speak the voice com-

mands after the tone sounds until the

preferred operation is executed.

7-2

INFO:

To cancel a voice command, push and

hold <>/< > on the steering wheel or

<BACK> on the control panel.

Operating tips

.Speak a command after the tone.

.If the command is not recognized, the

system will prompt you to speak the

command again. Repeat the com-

mand in a clear voice.

.Touch [ ] on the touch screen or

push <>/< > on the steering

wheel to return to the previous screen.

.To exit the Voice Recognition system,

push and hold <>/< > on the

steering wheel.

.To adjust the volume of the system

feedback, push + or - side of <>on

the steering wheel or turn the <VOL/

>or <VOLUME/ > while the sys-

tem is making an announcement.

The volume setting is also available

from [Guidance Volume] in the [Set-

tings] menu on the Launch Bar.

“Volume and Beeps settings”

(page 2-24)

.When setting a destination for route

guidance with some search methods,

such as POI, Intersection or City Center

search, the search area is automati-

cally set to the state/province where

your vehicle is located. Change state/

province to change the search area to

another state/province if necessary.

Voice Prompt Interrupt:

In most cases, you can interrupt the voice

feedback to speak the next command by

pushing the <>/< > on the steering

wheel. After interrupting the system, wait

for a tone before speaking your com-

mand.

One Shot Call:

To use the system faster when making a

call, you may speak the second level

command skipping speaking the first level

command. For example, push

<>/< > and say “Redial” after the

tone without first saying “Phone”.

How to see voice command

screen

1. Push < >/< > to display the first

screen of the voice command list.

2. Speak a command or select an item on

the voice command list. The Second

screen is displayed.

3. Speak a command or select an item on

the voice command list. The command

is executed or the next screen for

further command is displayed.

4. Follow the prompts to complete the

commands.

Voice command screens:

First screen

Shows a list of available categories.

Speak a category command or touch

7. Voice recognition

7-3

7. Voice recognition

the key of the corresponding cate-

gory.

Shows a list of available commands

for the selected category. Speak a

preferred command.

Touch [HELP] or say “Help” to hear

help announcements on how to use

the system.

INFO:

Push <>/< > to stop the help an-

nouncements.

Second screen

Previously selected command.

Command list

You can speak a command from the

list or touch the corresponding key.

Preferred words can be spoken for

the part of the command enclosed in

<>.

[Previous]/[Next]

Say as a command or touch to go to

the previous/next screen.

List screen

Speak a number from 1 to 5 or touch

an item on the list screen to select the

item.

How to speak numbers

The Voice Recognition system requires

the user to speak numbers in a certain

way when giving voice commands.

General rule:

500, 800 and 900 can be pronounced as

“five hundred”, “eight hundred” and “nine

hundred” respectively.

For other numbers, only single digits 0

(zero) to 9 can be used. (For example, for

the number “600”, speaking “six zero zero”

can be recognized by the system, but “six

hundred” cannot.)

Example:

1-800-662-6200

“One eight hundred six six two six two zero

zero”

INFO:

For the best recognition, speak “zero” for

the number “0”, and “oh” for the letter “o”.

Voice command examples

As examples, some additional basic op-

erations that can be performed by voice

commands are described here.

Example 1 Placing call by speaking a

phone number:

1. Push <>/< > located on the

steering wheel.

7-4

2. Wait for the indicator to change to .

Speak “Phone”.

3. Speak “Dial <phone number>”.

4. The phone number recognized by the

system is displayed on the screen. If

the number is correct, say “Dial”.

5. The system will make a phone call to

the spoken phone number.

Example 2 Setting home as a destina-

tion:

1. Push <>/< > located on the

steering wheel.

2. Wait for the indicator change to .

Speak “Navigation”.

3. Speak “Go Home”. The navigation sys-

tem will set home as a destination.

INFO:

.Location of home must be registered

to the Address Book prior to using this

command.

.The step of speaking “Navigation” can

be omitted.

Example 3 Displaying folders in the USB

device:

1. Push <>/< > located on the

steering wheel.

2. Wait for the indicator change to .

Speak “Audio”.

3. Speak “USB Show Folders”. The folders

in the connected USB device will

appear on the touch screen display.

7. Voice recognition

7-5

7. Voice recognition

Command list

To use the Voice Recognition function, you can speak commands in the order of 1st command, 2nd command and 3rd command. You

can also operate the system by directly speaking the 2nd or 3rd command.

Variable numbers or words such as names can be applied in the < > when speaking a command.

Some navigation commands are only for English.

General Command

Command Action

Show More Commands Display other commands of the same category.

Go Back Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen.

Exit Cancels Voice Recognition.

Help Announces how to use voice guidance.

Next Skip to the next page.

Previous Skip to the previous page.

General phone command

The following commands can be used during a phone Voice Recognition session.

Command Action

Dial The system makes a call to the spoken phone number.

Change Number Change a spoken phone number.

7-6

Phone Command

1st Command 2nd Command 3rd Command 4th Command Action

Phone Phonebook <phonebook name> Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone. You can

select the type from [Mobile], [Home], [Office], [Main] or [Other].

Call History Incoming Calls Displays an Incoming Call list.

Outgoing Calls Displays an Outgoing Call list.

Missed Calls Displays a Missed Call list.

Dial <#> Dial Makes a call to a spoken phone number.

Change Number Change a spoken phone number.

International

Call

<phone number> Makes an international call by allowing more than 11 digits to be

spoken.

You may need to include the international call prefixes and country

codes.

Redial Makes a call to the last outgoing phone number.

Add Phone Use this command to connect a compatible Bluetooth® device to

system. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing

process from your handset.

Select Phone <1-5> Use this command to select a phone from a list of the registered

devices.

Quick Dial <quick dial name> Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Quick Dial.

<1-5>

Call <name> Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Quick Dial or phonebook.

Call <phonebook name> Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone.

<phonebook name> <type> Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone. You can

select type from [Mobile], [Home], [Office], [Main] or [Other].

7. Voice recognition

7-7

7. Voice recognition

1st Command 2nd Command 3rd Command 4th Command Action

Send Text <phonebook name> You can select a text message from a list and send it to a contact name.

<phonebook name> <type> You can select a text message from a list and send it to a contact name.

You can select a type from [Mobile], [Home], [Office], [Main] or [Other].

Incoming Calls A list of spoken call history is displayed. Select a contact to whom you

wish to send the text message.

Outgoing Calls

Missed Calls

Enter Number Enter a phone number to which you wish to send the text message.

Say “Pick Message” to confirm the phone number and select a text

message.

<quick dial name> A phone number registered in the quick dial can be selected as a

recipient.

Read Text <1 - 5> Play You can listen to recent text messages received. Reads out a text

message. Select from the list of current received messages.

Reply Reply to a received message.

Call Call the sender of the message.

Operating tips for phone command operation:

.After the command “Call”, a name registered in the phonebook can be spoken for recognition, while a phone number can be

spoken after the command “Dial”. Names from the phonebook cannot be spoken after the command “Dial”.

.Names in the phonebook can be recognized when only a first name is spoken or when spoken in the order of first name and then

the last name. The system does not recognize the commands when only a last name is spoken or if the phonebook name was

pronounced with last name first and then the first name.

.The system has the function to read the text messages out loud, but misreading may occur in some cases.

.Even if nicknames such as “Mom” or “Dad” are registered in the cellular phone, the voice recognition system recognizes only names.

To have the system recognize the nicknames, register the entries in the [Quick Dial] from the Phone menu.

“Quick Dial” (page 4-12)

7-8

General navigation command

The following commands can be used during the Navigation voice recognition session.

Command Action

Select City Search a destination from the specified city.

Change State Change the state to search.

Calculate Route Calculate a route.

Adjust Location Fine-tune the destination.

Add as waypoint The selected location will be added to the route as a waypoint.

Change Address (English only) Change State After the street address is specified, change state, city, street, or house

number.

Change City

Change Street

Change House Number

Navigation Command (for U.S. and Canada)

1st Command 2nd Command 3rd Command Action

Navigation Street Address (Eng-

lish only)

<Full Address> Used to search for a street address.

Select State Select the state to search.

Street Address <Full Address> (English only) Used to search for a street address.

Points of Interest (English only) Speak a POI name to search for as a destination.

Points of Interest <POI name> (English only) Used to search for the POI within a specified state, province or city.

Follow the prompts to enter the place name.

Points of Interest

(English only)

<POI name> Used to search for the POI within a specified state or city. Follow the

prompts to enter the place name.

7. Voice recognition

7-9

7. Voice recognition

1st Command 2nd Command 3rd Command Action

Nearby <1 - 5> When a route is set, options of [Near Current Location], [Along Route]

and [Near Destination] will be displayed. Select an item to search for the

POI of the selected category in the preferred area.

POI Category

Nearby <POI Cate-

gory>

<1 - 5> Say “Nearby” followed by a POI category name such as Gas station,

Restaurant or Parking. You can say any category name that appears

when using manual controls. The system will always search for nearby

matches regardless of the current state location.

Go Home Sets a route to your home location.

Previous Destina-

tions

<1 - 5> Sets a route to a previously entered destination.

Address Book <Stored location

name>

<1-5>

Sets a route to a location stored in the Stored location.

City Center (English

only)

<City name> Sets a route to a city center.

Intersection (English

only)

<Street name> Sets a route to an intersection. To specify a city to narrow down the

search, select [Select City].

Recalculate Route Fastest Sets the route search condition to find the fastest route.

Sets the route search condition to find the route that is the most energy

saving.

Shortest distance Sets the route search condition to find the route that is the shortest in

distance.

Minimize Freeway Sets the route search condition to find a route with a minimal use of

freeways.

Traffic Detour Sets the route search condition to detour traffic jam and traffic

accident.

Distance Detour Sets a detour according to the distance selected from the list.

7-10

1st Command 2nd Command 3rd Command Action

Previous Start Point Sets a route with the previous starting point as a destination.

Cancel Route Cancels route and deletes the destination/waypoints.

Zoom In Zooms in the map scale by 1 step.

Zoom In <1-13> Increases the magnification of the map by the number of steps

specified.

Zoom Out Zooms out the map scale by 1 step.

Zoom Out <1-13> Decreases the magnification of the map by the number of steps

specified.

Zoom Streets Change to the street map.

North Up Sets the 2D full map to North Up.

Heading Up Sets the 2D full map to Heading Up.

Full Map Displays a full map.

Split Map Displays a split map.

2D Map Change the current map to a 2D Heading Up map.

3D Map Change the current map to a 3D map.

Repeat Voice Guidance Speaks the current navigation guidance.

Voice Guidance ON Turns the navigation guidance on.

Voice Guidance OFF Turns the navigation guidance off.

Show POI Icons Select a category of POI the icon you wish to display on map. Selected

POI icons will be displayed on the map screen.

Remove POI Icons Select a category of the POI icon you wish to delete from the map.

Selected POI icons will be deleted from the map screen.

7. Voice recognition

7-11

7. Voice recognition

1st Command 2nd Command 3rd Command Action

Route Information Display the route information.

Where am I? Displays the information of the current position.

Navigation Command (for Mexico)

1st Command 2nd Command 3rd Command Action

Navigation Nearby <1 - 5> When a route is set, options of [Near Current Location], [Along Route],

and [Near Destination] will be displayed. Select an item to search for

the POI of the selected category in the preferred area.

POI Category

Nearby <POI Cate-

gory>

<1 - 5> Say “Nearby” followed by a POI category name such as Gas station,

Restaurant, or Parking. You can say any category name that appears

when using manual controls. The system will always search for nearby

matches regardless of the current state location.

Go Home Sets a route to your home location.

Previous Destinations <1 - 5> Sets a route to a previously entered destination.

Address Book <Stored location

name>

<1-5>

Sets a route to a location stored in the Stored location.

Recalculate Route Fastest Sets the route search condition to find the fastest route.

Sets the route search condition to find the route that is the most

energy saving.

Shortest distance Sets the route search condition to find the route that is the shortest in

distance.

Minimize Freeway Sets the route search condition to find a route with a minimal use of

freeways.

Distance Detour Sets a detour according to the distance selected from the list.

7-12

1st Command 2nd Command 3rd Command Action

Previous Start Point Sets a route with the previous starting point as a destination.

Cancel Route Cancels route and deletes the destination/waypoints.

Zoom In Zooms in the map scale by 1 step.

Zoom In <1-13> Increases the magnification of the map by the number of steps

specified.

Zoom Out Zooms out the map scale by 1 step.

Zoom Out <1-13> Decreases the magnification of the map by the number of steps

specified.

Zoom Streets Change to the street map.

North Up Sets the 2D full map to North Up.

Heading Up Sets the 2D full map to Heading Up.

Full Map Displays a full map.

Split Map Displays a split map.

2D Map Change the current map to a 2D Heading Up map.

3D Map Change the current map to a 3D map.

Repeat Voice Guidance Speaks the current navigation guidance.

Voice Guidance ON Turns the navigation guidance on.

Voice Guidance OFF Turns the navigation guidance off.

Show POI Icons Select the category of the POI icon you wish to display on map.

Selected POI icons will be displayed on the map screen.

Remove POI Icons Select the category of the POI icon you wish to delete from the map.

Selected POI icons will be deleted from the map screen.

7. Voice recognition

7-13

7. Voice recognition

1st Command 2nd Command 3rd Command Action

Route Information Display the route information.

Where am I? Displays the information of the current position.

Operating tips for navigation command operation:

.Depending on the area where the vehicle is located (such as in Puerto Rico, Guam, etc.), the system may not recognize the general

navigation commands.

.Points Of Interest (for U.S. and Canada):

— The POI commands searches for Points of Interest registered in the navigation system.

— When searching for POI, the search is conducted within the current state/province or the state/province specified by “Change

State” command. To change the state/province, speak “Change State” after the prompt and then after the next prompt, speak

the name of the state/province for which you wish to conduct the POI search. The state/province will be reset to the current

state each time the voice recognition session is restarted.

— The following POI main categories cannot be used for “Points of Interest” search with voice command operations while all

registered categories can be recognized for “Nearby” search:

Others, Repair, Rental Car Agency, Parking, Police Station, Administration, ATM, Other Leisure, Bars & Clubs, Other Dealers,

Motorcycle Dealership, Medical Offices, Post Office, Auto Parts, Banquets & Food Delivery, Carwash, Copying, Day Care, Fire

Station, Laundry & Cleaners, Office Supply, Other Services, Other Shopping, Package Delivery

.Street Address (for U.S. and Canada):

— Alphabet letters cannot be included when speaking a house number. When a specified house number cannot be found, a

location representing the address will be displayed.

— Speak in a natural conversational speed without pausing between words for better recognition.

— When the system recognizes the command incorrectly, correct the search conditions using commands such as “Change State”,

“Change City”, “Change Street” or “Change House Number”.

7-14

Audio Command (for U.S. and Canada)

1st Command 2nd Command 3rd Command Action

Audio Play AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the last played station.

FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the last played station.

SXM Turns to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio band, selecting the channel last

played.

CD Turns on the CD, selecting the last played mode.

USB Turns on the USB, selecting the last played mode.

iPod Turns on the iPod, selecting the last played mode.

Bluetooth Audio Turns on the Bluetooth® Audio, selecting the last played mode.

AUX Turns on the AUX audio, selecting the last played mode.

Play AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the last played station.

Play FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the last played station.

Play SXM Turns to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio band, selecting the channel last

played.

Play CD Turns on the CD, selecting the last played mode.

Play USB Turns on the USB, selecting the last played mode.

Play iPod Turns on the iPod, selecting the last played mode.

Play Bluetooth Audio Turns on the Bluetooth® Audio, selecting the last played mode.

Play AUX Turns on the AUX audio, selecting the last played mode.

AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the last played station.

FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the last played station.

7. Voice recognition

7-15

7. Voice recognition

1st Command 2nd Command 3rd Command Action

SXM Turns to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio band, selecting the channel last

played.

CD Turns on the CD, selecting the last played mode.

USB Turns on the USB, selecting the last played mode.

iPod Turns on the iPod, selecting the last played mode.

Bluetooth Audio Turns on the Bluetooth® Audio, selecting the last played mode.

AUX Turns on the AUX audio, selecting the last played mode.

AM <am frequency> Turns to the AM band, selecting the station of the preferred frequency.

AM Preset <1-6> Plays the spoken AM preset station.

FM <fm frequency> Turns to the FM band, selecting the station of the preferred frequency.

FM Preset <1-12> Plays the spoken FM preset station.

SXM <Channel number> Turns to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio band, selecting the channel

number.

SXM <Channel name> Turns to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio band, selecting the channel

name.

SXM Preset <1-18> Plays the spoken SXM preset channel.

USB Show Folders Displays folders in the USB memory device.

USB Play Folder <folder name> Plays songs in the selected folder in the USB memory device.

USB Play File <file name> Plays songs in the selected file in the USB memory device.

iPod Play Artist <artist name> Turns on the iPod, selecting the artist.

iPod Play Album <album name> Turns on the iPod, selecting the album.

7-16

1st Command 2nd Command 3rd Command Action

iPod Play Song <song name> Turns on the iPod, selecting the track. You can speak the commands

successively.

iPod Play Playlist <playlist name> Turns on the iPod, playing the playlist that you spoke.

iPod Show Artists Displays a list of Artist names stored in the iPod.

iPod Show Albums Displays a list of Albums in the iPod.

iPod Show Songs Displays a list of songs in the iPod.

iPod Play Artist <ar-

tist name>

<1-5> Turns on the iPod, selecting the artist.

iPod Play Album <al-

bum name>

<1-5> Turns on the iPod, selecting the album.

iPod Play Song <song

name>

<1-5> Turns on the iPod, selecting the track. You can speak the commands

successively.

iPod Play Playlist

<1-5> Turns on the iPod, playing the playlist that you spoke.

iPod Play All Songs Plays all songs in the iPod.

Play Artist <artist name>

Plays the songs of the corresponding song list in the iPod.

Play Album <album name>

Play Song <song name>

Play Playlist <playlist name>

INFO:

A SiriusXM Travel Link or SiriusXM Traffic subscription is necessary to receive SiriusXM information services.

“SiriusXM Travel Link (for U.S. and Canada)” (page 5-18)

7. Voice recognition

7-17

7. Voice recognition

Audio Command (for Mexico)

1st Command 2nd Command 3rd Command Action

Audio Play AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the last played station.

FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the last played station.

CD Turns on the CD, selecting the last played mode.

USB Turns on the USB, selecting the last played mode.

iPod Turns on the iPod, selecting the last played mode.

Bluetooth Audio Turns on the Bluetooth® Audio, selecting the last played mode.

AUX Turns on the AUX audio, selecting the last played mode.

Play AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the last played station.

Play FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the last played station.

Play CD Turns on the CD, selecting the last played mode.

Play USB Turns on the USB, selecting the last played mode.

Play iPod Turns on the iPod, selecting the last played mode.

Play Bluetooth Audio Turns on the Bluetooth® Audio, selecting the last played mode.

Play AUX Turns on the AUX audio, selecting the last played mode.

AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the last played station.

FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the last played station.

CD Turns on the CD, selecting the last played mode.

USB Turns on the USB, selecting the last played mode.

iPod Turns on the iPod, selecting the last played mode.

7-18

1st Command 2nd Command 3rd Command Action

Bluetooth Audio Turns on the Bluetooth® Audio, selecting the last played mode.

AUX Turns on the AUX audio, selecting the last played mode.

AM <am frequency> Turns to the AM band, selecting the station of the preferred

frequency.

AM Preset <1-6> Plays the spoken AM preset station.

FM <fm frequency> Turns to the FM band, selecting the station of the preferred

frequency.

FM Preset <1-12> Plays the spoken FM preset station.

USB Show Folders Displays folders in the USB memory device.

USB Play Folder <folder name> Plays songs in the selected folder in the USB memory device.

USB Play File <file name> Plays songs in the selected file in the USB memory device.

iPod Play Artist <artist name> Turns on the iPod, selecting the artist.

iPod Play Album <album name> Turns on the iPod, selecting the album.

iPod Play Song <song name> Turns on the iPod, selecting the track. You can speak the commands

successively.

iPod Play Playlist <playlist name> Turns on the iPod, playing the playlist that you spoke.

iPod Show Artists Displays a list of Artist names stored in the iPod.

iPod Show Albums Displays a list of Albums in the iPod.

iPod Show Songs Displays a list of songs in the iPod.

iPod Play Artist <ar-

tist name>

<1-5> Turns on the iPod, selecting the artist.

iPod Play Album <al-

bum name>

<1-5> Turns on the iPod, selecting the album.

7. Voice recognition

7-19

7. Voice recognition

1st Command 2nd Command 3rd Command Action

iPod Play Song <song

name>

<1-5> Turns on the iPod, selecting the track. You can speak the commands

successively.

iPod Play Playlist

<1-5> Turns on the iPod, playing the playlist that you spoke.

iPod Play All Songs Plays all songs in the iPod.

Play Artist <artist name>

Plays the songs of the corresponding song list in the iPod.

Play Album <album name>

Play Song <song name>

Play Playlist <playlist name>

Operating tips for audio command operation:

.An audio device connected via Bluetooth® cannot be operated with the Voice Recognition system. Source change is only available

for Bluetooth® streaming Audio.

.The Voice Recognition system may not function when the song information is too long (artist names, album titles, song titles and

play lists, etc.).

.The SiriusXM function will not operate without a subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio (for U.S. and Canada).

.When playing USB files with the voice recognition system, do not pronounce the extension attached to the file name (such as “.

mp3”).

.Song titles registered in ID3 tags cannot be pronounced for voice recognition operation.

.Models with two USB connection ports:

If two USB devices are connected at the same time, voice operation will only be available for use with one registered and selected

device. When selecting “YES” in the pop-up screen that displays after a new USB audio device is connected, the USB audio device is

registered in the voice recognition system and is selected automatically. One iPod and one USB device can be registered in the

system. If a USB audio device is newly registered, old data is overwritten. It may take a few moments to register an audio device. If

you want to enable voice operation for music stored in a previously registered audio device, select the device you want to use in

advance. Even when a device has been previously registered, simply connecting the device will not result in it being selected

7-20

automatically.

“Voice recognition settings” (page 7-23)

Information Command (for U.S. and Canada)

1st Command 2nd Command Action

Information Where am I? Displays information of the current position.

SXM Weather Map Displays the SiriusXM Weather map.

SXM Current Weather Displays the nearby weather (current weather).

SXM Weather Forecast Displays the weather forecast.

SXM Fuel Prices Displays fuel prices.

SXM Movie Listings Displays SiriusXM Movie Listings.

SXM Stocks Displays SiriusXM stock information.

SXM Sports Scores Displays sports scores.

SXM Traffic Turns the traffic information system on or off.

Favorite Feeds (if so equipped) Plays Favorite Feeds.

All Information Feeds (if so equipped) Plays Information Feeds.

Voice Menu (if so equipped) Connects NissanConnect

Services center.

Energy Flow (model with hybrid system) Displays Energy Flow.

INFO:

A SiriusXM Travel Link or SiriusXM Traffic subscription is necessary to receive SiriusXM information services.

“SiriusXM Travel Link (for U.S. and Canada)” (page 5-18)

7. Voice recognition

7-21

7. Voice recognition

Information Command (for Mexico)

1st Command 2nd Command Action

Information Where am I? Displays information of the current position.

7-22

VOICE RECOGNITION SETTINGS

The voice recognition settings can be

changed.

1. Touch [Setting] on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch [Voice Recognition].

3. Touch the item you would like to set.

Available settings

.[Minimize Voice Feedback]:

Turns the minimize voice feedback

function on/off. When this item is

turned on, short and minimized voice

feedback will be provided.

.[Audio device setting]:

Select an audio device to be operated

via the Voice Recognition system from

the audio devices connected to the

USB connection ports. A device with an

indicator light illuminated can be op-

erated with the Voice Recognition

system.

7. Voice recognition

7-23

7. Voice recognition

MEMO

7-24

8 Troubleshooting guide

Customer assistance ................................................................. 8-2

System unit........................................................................................ 8-3

Liquid crystal display ........................................................... 8-3

Audio system ................................................................................... 8-5

HD Radio technology (for U.S.) ..................................... 8-5

Compact Disc (CD) player ................................................ 8-7

iPod player ................................................................................... 8-9

USB memory device .......................................................... 8-11

Bluetooth® streaming audio ...................................... 8-12

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System .................... 8-14

NissanConnect

Services (if so equipped).......... 8-17

Apple CarPlay ............................................................................... 8-18

Android Auto ................................................................................ 8-19

Navigation....................................................................................... 8-21

Basic operations................................................................ 8-21

Vehicle icon ........................................................................... 8-22

Route calculation and visual guidance ........... 8-24

Voice guidance ................................................................... 8-27

Traffic information (for U.S. and Canada) ...... 8-28

Voice recognition ...................................................................... 8-29

8. Troubleshooting guide

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

For U.S. and Canada

For assistance or to order updated map

data, contact the NISSAN NAVIGATION

SYSTEM HELPDESK. For other assistance

or inquiries, contact NISSAN Consumer

Affairs Department. See the contact in-

formation on the inside front cover of this

manual.

For Mexico

For assistance or inquiries about Nissan-

Connect

with Navigation, or to order

updated map data for the navigation

system, contact a NISSAN dealer.

8-2

SYSTEM UNIT

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The screen is too dark. The cabin temperature is too low. Wait until the cabin temperature becomes

moderate.

Screen brightness is set to the maximum

darkness.

Adjust the brightness setting of the screen.

“Display settings” (page 2-24)

The screen is too bright. Screen brightness is set to the maximum

brightness.

Adjust the brightness setting of the screen.

“Display settings” (page 2-24)

A small black spot or a small bright spot

appears on the screen.

This is a typical phenomenon for liquid crystal

displays.

This is not a malfunction.

A dot or stripe pattern appears on the screen. Electromagnetic waves that are generated

from neon billboards, high voltage electric

power cables, ham radios or other radio

devices equipped to other vehicles may

adversely affect the screen.

This is not a malfunction.

Image lag appears on the screen. This is a typical phenomenon for liquid crystal

displays.

This is not a malfunction.

Image motion displayed on the screen is slow. The cabin temperature is less than 50°F

(10°C).

Wait until the cabin temperature rises to

within 50°F (10°C) and 122°F (50°C).

When looking at the screen from an angle, the

screen lightens or darkens.

This is a typical phenomenon for liquid crystal

displays.

Adjust the brightness setting of the screen.

“Display settings” (page 2-24)

8. Troubleshooting guide

8-3

8. Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The screen turns blue or an error message is

displayed on the touch screen display.

A system malfunction has occurred. It is recommended you contact a NISSAN

dealer for an inspection.

The SD card is not inserted into the slot

correctly.

If the SD card containing map data is acci-

dentally removed, after reinserting the SD

card containing map data into the slot, place

the ignition switch in the OFF position and

then place back in the ON position again.

Navigation system related functions cannot

be operated.

The SD card is not inserted into the slot. Insert the appropriate SD card.

8-4

AUDIO SYSTEM

HD RADIO TECHNOLOGY (for U.S.)

Sound

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Delay in digital audio on HD Radio broadcasts. The radio acquires an analog station first and

blends to an digital signal.

This is not a malfunction.

Audio skips, stutters, or echoes. The radio station has not properly aligned the

digital and analog audio.

Verify correct operation on another station.

Report any station with poor performance.

Volume changing up/down. The radio station has not properly aligned

digital and analog audio level.

Verify correct operation on another station

and check www.hdradio.com for stations in

the area. Report any station with poor

performance.

Sound fading in and out. The transition between analog and digital is

taking place (blending).

Verify transition performance on several sta-

tions in the area. Report any stations with

poor alignment.

Excessive blending (Transition between ana-

log and digital).

The receiver is located near the edge of the

digital coverage area.

Refer to hdradio.com to verify radio stations

in your coverage area.

Digital audio not better than analog audio. Audio processing on the digital audio at a

station can potentially decrease the digital

audio sound quality.

Verify correct operation on another station.

Report any station with poor performance.

8. Troubleshooting guide

8-5

8. Troubleshooting guide

Functional

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Keep losing my local stations. The digital coverage is slightly less than the

analog signal coverage.

Verify correct operation on another station.

This is expected behavior.

Shadowing (urban/terrain) can cause re-

duced digital coverage.

Verify correct operation on another station.

Some data fields are blank. Text information is sent at the broadcaster’s

discretion.

Verify correct operation on another station.

Report station issues.

Text information is truncated / appears to be

more available.

The display is limited to a fixed number of

characters and more data is being sent than

can be shown.

This is an intended behavior.

AM reception changes at night. AM stations are required by the government

(FCC) to lower their power at night.

This is not a malfunction.

8-6

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Music cannot be played back. The disc is inserted upside down. Insert a CD with the label side facing up.

Moisture condensation occurs inside the unit. Wait until the moisture evaporates (approxi-

mately 1 hour).

The cabin temperature is too high. Wait until the cabin temperature becomes

moderate.

The disc is scratched or dirty. A disc is not

always playable if it is scratched.

Wipe off any dirt from the disc.

Depending on the condition in which they are

stored, discs may become unreadable due to

deterioration (for example, keeping the discs

in the passenger compartment, etc.).

Change the disc with a deterioration-free

disc. Do not use a deteriorated disc. The label

surface of the disc may crack or chip, and the

layer of the label surface may eventually peel

off.

The compressed audio files cannot be played

back.

If both music CD files (CD-DA data) and

compressed audio files (MP3 data, etc.) are

mixed on one disc, the audio compression

files cannot be played back.

Prepare a disc that includes compressed

audio files only.

The files are not named using characters that

are compliant with the specifications.

Use the character codes and the number of

characters that are compliant with the spe-

cifications for folder names and file names. In

addition, always use “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.

wma” for file extensions.

It takes a long time before the music starts

playing.

The disc contains a large amount of data. Some time may be required to check the files.

It is recommended that unnecessary folders

or any files other than compressed audio files

should not be recorded in a disc.

The sound quality is poor. The disc is dirty. Wipe off any dirt from the disc.

8. Troubleshooting guide

8-7

8. Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

No sounds are played though the CD play

time is displayed.

The system plays back the first track of the

mix mode disc. (Mix mode is a format in which

data except music is recorded on the first

track and music data is recorded on one

other than the first track in a session.)

Play back music data that are recorded on

one other than the first track.

Music cuts off or skips. The combination of writing software and

hardware might not match; or the writing

speed, writing depth, writing width, etc. might

not match the specifications.

Create a disc using different writing speed

settings, etc.

The system skips the selected track and

moves to the next track.

A non-MP3/WMA file is given an extension of “.

MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”.

Prepare MP3/WMA files.

The system plays back a file that is prohibited

due to copyright protection.

Prepare playable files.

The tracks do not play back in the desired

order.

The folder locations in the disc are changed

by the writing software while the files are

written in the disc.

Check the settings of the writing software,

and create a new disc.

The CD cannot be ejected. The ignition switch is not placed in the ACC or

ON position.

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position.

8-8

iPod PLAYER

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The system does not recognize an iPod. A connector cable is not correctly connected,

or the iPod does not correctly operate.

Connect the connector cable again. If the

system does not recognize the iPod after

performing this procedure above, reset the

iPod.

The iPod that is to be connected is not

compatible with the system.

Check the iPod model and firmware versions

available for the system.

A USB extension cable is not correctly con-

nected.

Do not use a USB extension cable.

The cable is rapidly connected to or discon-

nected from the USB connection port.

Slowly connect or disconnect the USB cable.

An iPod cannot be operated. The iPod is connected to the in-vehicle audio

system while headsets, etc. are connected to

the iPod.

Remove all equipment from the iPod after

disconnecting the iPod from the system, and

then connect it to the system again.

The iPod is not operating normally. Disconnect the iPod from the in-vehicle audio

system, and then connect it to the system

again.

The system plays back an album/file that

includes a particular album art.

Disconnect the iPod from the in-vehicle audio

system, and then reset the iPod. Disable the

album art, and then connect the iPod to the

system.

“iPod Menu” (page 3-31)

An iPod does not respond. There are too many files in a category. Decrease the number of files in a category

(less than 65500 files).

The shuffle function is turned on. Turn off the shuffle function if many files are

stored on the iPod.

Music cannot be played back. A connector is not connected to the iPod. Firmly connect the connector to the iPod.

Playback cuts out. The sound cuts due to vibration resulting

from an unstable location of the iPod.

Place the iPod on a stable location where it

does not roll over.

8. Troubleshooting guide

8-9

8. Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Distorted sound occurs. The EQ (equalizer) function of the iPod is

turned on.

Turn off the EQ (equalizer) function on your

iPod.

Battery charge of an iPod takes longer. Battery charge of the iPod may take longer

while an iPod is playing back.

If the iPod needs to be charged, it is recom-

mended to stop playing the music.

Battery charge of an iPod is unavailable. The cable that is connected to the iPod may

be damaged or improperly connected.

Check the cable currently in use.

Functions cannot be operated using an iPod

that is connected to the in-vehicle audio

system. -

The operation of an iPod must be performed

using the in-vehicle audio system after the

iPod is connected to the system.

Sound skips. Surrounding circumstances (noise, etc.) may

cause the sound to skip.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

A USB extension cable is used. Do not use a USB extension cable.

8-10

USB MEMORY DEVICE

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The system does not recognize a USB device. A USB extension cable is used. Do not use a USB extension cable.

A USB hub is used. Do not use a USB hub.

A USB device is rapidly connected to or

disconnected from the USB connection port.

Slowly connect or disconnect the USB device.

8. Troubleshooting guide

8-11

8. Troubleshooting guide

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Registration cannot be performed. The Bluetooth® audio device is not compa-

tible with the in-vehicle audio system.

Check the Bluetooth® audio device Owner’s

Manual.

Bluetooth® is disabled on device. Check that the Bluetooth® function is enabled

on device.

The PIN code is incorrect. Check the PIN code for the Bluetooth® audio

device that is to be registered.

Check that the PIN code for the Bluetooth®

audio device is consistent with that for the in-

vehicle audio system.

Another Bluetooth® device is used in the

vehicle.

Turn off the other Bluetooth® device until the

registration is completed.

Music cannot be played back. The Bluetooth® audio device is not compa-

tible with the in-vehicle audio system.

Check the Bluetooth® audio device Owner’s

Manual.

The system is not set to the Bluetooth® audio

mode.

Push <AUDIO> to select the Bluetooth® audio

mode.

A Bluetooth® adapter is turned off. Turn on a Bluetooth® adapter when it is used

for a Bluetooth® audio device.

Playback stops. The Bluetooth® audio device is not compa-

tible with the in-vehicle audio system.

Visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/ to

check Bluetooth® audio device compatibility.

A cellular call is active. This is not a malfunction.

Sound may cut out when a Bluetooth® audio

device is operated.

Push <AUDIO> to select the Bluetooth® audio

mode, and then operate a function on the

touch screen display of the in-vehicle system

instead of conducting the operation on the

Bluetooth® audio device.

8-12

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Audio operation cannot be performed. A Bluetooth® audio device that does not

support audio operations is in use.

Visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/ to

check Bluetooth® audio device compatibility.

An error occurs when connecting to a Blue-

tooth® audio profile.

Turn the power source of the Bluetooth®

audio player off and on, and then resume

connection with the system.

8. Troubleshooting guide

8-13

8. Troubleshooting guide

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

A cellular phone cannot be registered. The cellular phone is not compatible with the

in-vehicle hands-free phone system.

Use a cellular phone compatible with the system.

Visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/ to check

compatibility.

Registration of the cellular phone has been

performed incorrectly.

Check the registration procedure, and then regis-

ter the cellular phone again.

A cellular phone cannot be connected or

is disconnected after the registration is

completed.

The Bluetooth® setting of the in-vehicle

hands-free phone system is turned off.

Turn on the Bluetooth® setting of the system.

The Bluetooth® setting of the cellular phone

is turned off.

Turn on the Bluetooth® setting of the cellular

phone.

The remaining battery level of the cellular

phone is low.

Charge the battery of the cellular phone.

The wireless Bluetooth® connection may be

disrupted depending on the location of the

cellular phone.

Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the in-

vehicle hands-free phone system. Do not place the

cellular phone close to the seats or your body.

Registration of the cellular phone is not

completed.

Perform registration of the cellular phone.

A call to a particular phone number fails. If the system tries to make a call several times

to the same phone number (for example: the

party does not respond to the call, the party is

out of the service area, or the call is aban-

doned before the party responds), the system

may reject a request to make a call to the

phone number.

Turn off the cellular phone and turn it on again to

reset the connection.

8-14

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The system does not recognize the

connection of a cellular phone. The

system does not receive or make a call.

The cellular phone is not compatible with the

in-vehicle hands-free phone system.

Use a cellular phone compatible with the system.

Visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/ to check

compatibility.

The cellular phone is not connected. Check the registration procedure, and then regis-

ter the cellular phone again.

The phone operation is limited by the func-

tions (such as dial lock, etc.) of the registered

cellular phone.

Remove any settings that are limiting use of the

cellular phone, and then perform registration

again.

The other party cannot hear your voice.

The other party can hear your voice, but

it cracks or cuts out.

Mute function is enabled. Verify mute function is disabled.

The cellular phone is not connected. Check the registration procedure, and then regis-

ter the cellular phone again.

The fan speed of the heater/air conditioner is

too fast.

Decrease the fan speed of the heater/air condi-

tioner.

The ambient noise level is excessive. (For

example: heavy rain, construction sites, inside

a tunnel, oncoming vehicles, etc.)

Close the windows to shut out ambient noise.

The noise generated by driving the vehicle is

too loud.

Reduce the vehicle speed.

The incoming or outgoing voice level is too

loud.

Adjust the incoming or outgoing voice level

properly.

The voice is cut out or noise is heard

during a call.

The wireless Bluetooth® connection may be

disrupted depending on the location of the

cellular phone.

Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the in-

vehicle hands-free phone system. Do not place a

cellular phone close to the seats or your body.

When a cellular phone is operated to

make a call, the hands-free function

becomes unavailable.

Some models of a cellular phone do not

switch to the hands-free mode when they are

operated to make a call.

This is not a malfunction. Make a call again using

the hands-free function.

8. Troubleshooting guide

8-15

8. Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The other party’s voice cannot be heard.

There is no ring tone.

The volume level is set to the minimum. Adjust the volume level.

A cellular phone is not connected. Check the registration procedure, and then regis-

ter the cellular phone again.

Each volume level (ring tone, incoming

voice or outgoing voice) is different.

Each volume level is not adjusted properly. Adjust each volume level properly.

The antenna display is different between

the navigation screen and a cellular

phone screen. Making or receiving a call

is unavailable even though the antenna

display shows that it is possible to do so.

The antenna display varies depending on the

model of cellular phone.

This does not indicate a malfunction. The antenna

display and remaining battery level shown on the

navigation screen may be different from those

shown on the cellular phone screen. Use them as a

reference.

A voice cannot be heard clearly when

using a cellular phone behind tall build-

ings.

Some structures such as tall buildings, etc.

may cause irregular reflection of radio waves

or completely shut out radio waves that are

used for cellular phones.

Move to a place without tall buildings.

Noise is heard when using a cellular

phone under/near areas of elevated

railroads, high voltage electric power

cables, traffic signals, neon billboards,

etc.

Electromagnetic waves that are generated

from radio devices may adversely affect the

cellular phone.

This is not a malfunction.

Noise is heard in the sound from the

audio system while using a cellular

phone.

Radio waves that are generated from a

cellular phone may adversely affect the

sound from the audio system.

This is not a malfunction.

Sound skips or stutters. The cellular phone may have turned on the

wireless LAN (Wi-Fi).

Turn off the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi).

Phonebook cannot be downloaded. An error occurred during the phone pairing

process.

Please delete the Bluetooth® pairing information

from both the mobile phone and vehicle system

before registering it again.

Phone does not support phonebook down-

load function.

Visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/ to check

compatibility.

8-16

NISSANCONNECT

SERVICES

(if so equipped)

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The system cannot con-

nect to the NissanCon-

nect

Services Data

Center.

A subscription for the NissanCon-

nect

Services has not been estab-

lished.

Services. For details

about subscriptions, contact the NissanConnect

Services support line

at 1-855-426-6628.

The communication line is busy. Try again after a short period of time.

The vehicle is in a location where it is

difficult to receive radio waves.

When the vehicle moves to an area where radio waves can be

transmitted sufficiently, communication will be restored. When the icon

on the display shows that the vehicle is inside the communication area,

the system can be used.

TCU (Telematics Control Unit) is not

turned on.

If the icon does not show that the vehicle is inside the communication

area despite the fact that the vehicle is in that location, contact the

NissanConnect

Services support line at 1-855-426-6628.

Radio wave reception is not sufficient

for TCU (Telematics Control Unit)

operation.

When the vehicle moves to an area where radio waves can be

transmitted sufficiently, communication will be restored. When the icon

on the display shows that the vehicle is inside the communication area,

the system can be used.

Some of the items that are

displayed on the menu

screen cannot be selected.

The vehicle is being driven and some

menu items are disabled.

Stop the vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking brake before

operating the menu screen items.

Some parts of the screen

are not displayed.

The vehicle is being driven and some

menu items are disabled.

Operate the system after stopping the vehicle in a safe location and

applying the parking brake.

The system does not an-

nounce information.

The volume level is set to the mini-

mum.

Adjust the volume level by operating the <VOL/

>or <VOLUME/ >

located on the control panel or <>on the steering wheel switch while

the system is announcing information.

8. Troubleshooting guide

8-17

8. Troubleshooting guide

Apple CarPlay

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot start Apple CarPlay though it is tethered to the

vehicle.

The USB cable is not connected to the USB connection port. Properly connect the

USB cable to the USB connection port.

For models with two USB connection ports, the USB cable must be connected to

the USB connection port 1 for Apple CarPlay operation.

“USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port and AUX (auxiliary) input jack”

(page 2-12)

Apple CarPlay setting is not active on your iPhone. Turn on “CarPlay” on your

iPhone.

Device is not compatible with Apple CarPlay. Check compatibility requirements.

Apple CarPlay performance decreases. For example,

slow connectivity or slow application functionality.

An error message appears when trying to access

features of Apple CarPlay. A blank screen appears when

trying to access maps.

Confirm you have a compatible iPhone, a cellular connection and an active data

plan.

Use Apple Lightning cable to connect your phone to the USB connection port.

Phone’s performance or cellular connection. Disconnect and reconnect your

phone.

Phone’s performance or cellular connection. Close all apps and restart them.

Phone’s performance or cellular connection. Cycle phone power off/on to restart.

Cannot access Siri using the switch on the steering

wheel.

The USB cable may not be properly connected. Disconnect and reconnect the USB

cable.

Siri setting is not enabled on the phone. Turn on “Siri” on your phone.

Check that you are pushing and holding <

>/< > instead of just pushing the

switch to initiate Siri operation.

8-18

Android Auto

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot start Android Auto though it is connected to the

vehicle.

The USB cable is not connected to the USB connection port. Properly connect the

USB cable to the USB connection port.

For models with two USB connection ports, the USB cable must be connected to

the USB connection port 1 for Android Auto operation.

“USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port and AUX (auxiliary) input jack”

(page 2-12)

Always Start Android Auto setting is not active on your in-vehicle system. Turn on

[Always Start Android Auto] on your in-vehicle system.

“Android Auto settings” (page 5-25)

Touch [Smartphone Connection] or [Android Auto] on the MENU screen to activate

Android Auto.

“How to view and operate HOME MENU screen” (page 2-19)

The connected device is not compatible with Android Auto. Check the compat-

ibility requirements.

Your Android phone may not be recognized if its battery is low. Charge your

Android phone then try again.

Android Auto performance decreases. For example, slow

connectivity or slow application functionality.

An error message appears when trying to access

features of Android Auto. A blank screen appears when

trying to access maps.

Confirm you have a compatible Android phone, a cellular connection and an active

data plan.

Use the Android phone OEM cable to connect your phone to the USB connection

port.

Phone’s performance or cellular connection. Disconnect and reconnect your

phone.

Phone’s performance or cellular connection. Close all apps and restart them.

Phone’s performance or cellular connection. Cycle phone power off/on to restart.

8. Troubleshooting guide

8-19

8. Troubleshooting guide

Cannot start voice operation using the switch on the

steering wheel.

The USB cable may not be properly connected. Disconnect and reconnect the USB

cable.

To use the voice operation function while driving, turn on the "While driving"

setting on your Android phone.

Check that you are pushing and holding <>/< > instead of just pushing the

switch to voice operation.

8-20

NAVIGATION

BASIC OPERATIONS

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

No image is displayed. The brightness is at the lowest setting. Adjust the brightness of the display.

“Display settings” (page 2-24)

The display is turned off. Push <>to turn on the display.

The volume of the voice guidance is too high

or too low.

The volume is not set correctly, or the voice

guidance setting is turned off.

Adjust the volume of the voice guidance or

turn on the voice guidance setting.

“Volume and Beeps settings” (page 2-24)

No voice guidance is available. Voice guidance is not provided for certain

streets (roads displayed in gray).

This is not a malfunction.

No map is displayed on the screen. A screen other than a map screen is dis-

played.

Touch [Map] on the Launch Bar or push

<MAP>.

The screen is too dim. The movement is slow. The temperature in the interior of the vehicle

is low.

Wait until the interior of the vehicle has

warmed up.

Some pixels in the display are darker or

brighter than others.

This condition is an inherent characteristic of

liquid crystal displays.

This is not a malfunction.

Some menu items cannot be selected. Some menu items become unavailable while

the vehicle is driven.

Park the vehicle in a safe location, and then

operate the navigation system.

8. Troubleshooting guide

8-21

8. Troubleshooting guide

VEHICLE ICON

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Names of roads and locations differ

between 2D view and Birdview™.

This is because the quantity of the displayed informa-

tion is reduced so that the screen does not become too

cluttered. There is also a chance that names of the

roads or locations may be displayed multiple times, and

the names appearing on the screen may be different

because of a processing procedure.

This is not a malfunction.

The location of the vehicle icon is

misaligned from the actual position.

The vehicle was transported after the ignition switch

was placed in the OFF position, for example, by a ferry or

car transporter.

Drive the vehicle for a period of time on a

road where GPS signals can be received.

The position and direction of the vehicle icon may be

incorrect depending on the driving environments and

the levels of positioning accuracy of the navigation

system.

This is not a malfunction. Drive the vehicle

for a period of time to automatically

correct the position and direction of the

vehicle icon.

“Current vehicle location” (page 6-61)

Driving with tire chains or tires that have been replaced

may result in an incorrect vehicle location display due to

miscalculation by the speed sensor.

Drive the vehicle for a period of time (at

approximately 19 MPH (30 km/h) for about

30 minutes) to automatically correct the

vehicle icon position.

If this does not correct the vehicle icon

position, it is recommended you contact a

NISSAN dealer.

The map data has a mistake or is incomplete (the

vehicle icon position is always misaligned in the same

area).

Updated road information will be included

in the next version of the map data.

When the vehicle is traveling on a new

road, the vehicle icon is located on

another road nearby.

Because the new road is not stored in the map data, the

system automatically places the vehicle icon on the

nearest road available.

Updated road information will be included

in the next version of the map data.

“How to order map data updates”

(page 6-68)

8-22

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The screen does not switch to the

night screen even after turning on the

headlights.

The daytime screen was set the last time the headlights

were turned on.

Set the screen to the night screen mode

using <>when turning on the head-

lights.

“Display settings” (page 2-24)

The map does not scroll even when

the vehicle is moving.

The current location map screen is not displayed. Touch [Map] on the Launch Bar or push

<MAP>.

The vehicle icon is not displayed. The current location map screen is not displayed. Touch [Map] on the Launch Bar or push

<MAP>.

8. Troubleshooting guide

8-23

8. Troubleshooting guide

ROUTE CALCULATION AND VISUAL GUIDANCE

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Waypoints are not included in

the auto reroute calculation.

Waypoints that have been already passed are not included

in the auto reroute calculation.

To go to that waypoint again, edit the route.

Route information is not dis-

played.

Route calculation has not yet been performed. Set the destination and perform route calcu-

lation.

The vehicle is not on the suggested route. Drive on the suggested route.

Route guidance is turned off. Turn on route guidance.

Route information is not provided for certain types of

roads (roads displayed in dark green).

This is not a malfunction.

The auto reroute calculation (or

detour calculation) suggests the

same route as the one pre-

viously suggested.

Route calculations took priority conditions into consid-

eration, but the same route was calculated.

This is not a malfunction.

A waypoint cannot be added. Five waypoints are already set on the route, including ones

that the vehicle has already passed.

A maximum of 5 waypoints can be set on the

route. To go to 6 or more waypoints, perform

route calculations multiple times as neces-

sary.

8-24

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The suggested route is not dis-

played.

Roads near the destination cannot be calculated. Reset the destination to a main or ordinary

road, and recalculate the route.

The starting point and destination are too close. Set a more distant destination.

The starting point and destination are too far away. Divide the trip by selecting one or two

intermediate destinations, and perform route

calculations multiple times.

There are time restricted roads (by the day of the week, by

time) near the current vehicle location or destination.

Select [Do Not Use Restriction Info] in the

[Time Restricted Rd] setting (for U.S. and

Canada).

“Route Settings” (page 6-44)

Turn off the [Time Restricted Rd] setting (for

Mexico).

“Route Settings” (page 6-44)

A part of the route is not dis-

played.

The suggested route includes narrow streets (roads

displayed in gray).

This is not a malfunction.

The part of the route that the

vehicle has already passed is

deleted.

A route is managed by sections between waypoints. If the

vehicle passed the first waypoint, the section between the

starting point and the waypoint is deleted (it may not be

deleted depending on the area).

This is not a malfunction.

An indirect route is suggested. If there are restrictions (such as one-way streets) on roads

close to the starting point or destination, the system may

suggest an indirect route.

Adjust the location of the starting point or

destination.

The system may suggest an indirect route because route

calculation does not take into consideration some areas

such as narrow streets (gray roads).

Reset the destination to a main or ordinary

road, and recalculate the route.

The landmark information does

not correspond to the actual

information.

This may be caused by insufficient or incorrect map data. Updated information will be included in the

next version of the map data.

“How to order map data updates”

(page 6-68)

8. Troubleshooting guide

8-25

8. Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The suggested route does not

exactly connect to the starting

point, waypoints or destination.

There is no data for route calculation closer to these

locations.

Set the starting point, waypoints and desti-

nation on a main road, and perform route

calculation.

8-26

VOICE GUIDANCE

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Voice guidance is not available. Voice guidance is only available at certain intersections

marked with . In some cases, voice guidance is not

available even when the vehicle makes a turn.

This is not a malfunction.

The vehicle has deviated from the suggested route. Go back to the suggested route or

request route calculation again.

Voice guidance is turned off. Turn on voice guidance.

Route guidance is turned off. Turn on route guidance.

The guidance content does not

correspond to the actual road con-

ditions.

The content of voice guidance may vary, depending on the

types of intersections at which turns are made.

Follow all traffic rules and regulations.

8. Troubleshooting guide

8-27

8. Troubleshooting guide

TRAFFIC INFORMATION (for U.S.

and Canada)

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Traffic information is not displayed. Traffic information is not turned on. Turn on the traffic information.

The vehicle is in an area where traffic information

is not available.

Scroll to an area where traffic information is

available.

The subscription to SiriusXM Traffic is incomplete,

or the subscription to SiriusXM Traffic has expired.

Check the subscription status of SiriusXM Traffic.

“Notes on SiriusXM Traffic information”

(page 5-19)

The map scale is set at a level where the display of

icons is impossible.

Check that the map scale is set at a level in which

the display of icons is possible.

“Traffic information on map” (page 6-48)

With the automatic detour route

turned on, no detour route is set to

avoid congested areas.

There is no faster route compared to the current

route, based on the road network and the traffic

information.

The automatic detour search is not intended for

avoiding traffic jams. It searches for the fastest

route taking conditions such as traffic jams into

consideration. Follow the current route.

“Notes on SiriusXM Traffic information”

(page 5-19)

The route does not avoid a road

section with traffic information

stating that it is closed due to road

construction.

The navigation system is designed not to avoid

this event because the actual period of closure

may differ from the declared roadwork period.

Observe the actual road conditions and follow the

instructions on the road for a detour when

necessary. If the road is closed, use the detour

function and set the detour distance to avoid the

road section that is closed.

8-28

VOICE RECOGNITION

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The system does not operate or fails to

interpret the command correctly.

The interior of the vehicle is too noisy. Close the windows or have the other occu-

pants be quiet.

The fan speed of the heater/air conditioner is

too fast.

Decrease the fan speed of the heater/air

conditioner.

The noise generated by driving the vehicle is

too loud.

Reduce the vehicle speed.

The voice command is spoken in a low voice. Speak the command in a louder voice.

The timing of speaking a command is too

early.

Speak the command after confirming the

following: a voice guidance is announced, a

tone sounds, and an icon on the screen

changes from gray to orange.

The command is spoken too slowly. Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

The system prompts to repeat a command. Pronunciation is unclear. Speak clearly.

The command is spoken too late after the

tone.

Speak the command within 5 seconds after

confirming the following: a voice guidance is

announced, a tone sounds, and an icon on

the screen changes from gray to orange.

An improper command is spoken. Speak the command or a number that is

displayed on the screen.

Speak a command that is shown in the

command list.

The system does not correctly recognize a

number spoken.

Too many numbers are spoken at once. Place a pause between the appropriate digits

for correct recognition by the system. When

speaking a telephone number, place a pause

between area codes, dial codes, etc.

8. Troubleshooting guide

8-29

8. Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

USB memory device cannot be operated with

voice commands.

Depending on the device, iPhone or iPod may

be recognized as a USB memory device.

This is not malfunction

More than one audio device is connected to

USB connection port.

Only one audio device can be operated with

the voice recognition system even when

multiple numbers of devices are connected.

Select an audio source to operate with the

voice recognition system.

“Voice recognition settings” (page 7-23)

The USB/iPod operation screen is grayed out. The audio device is not connected. Connect an audio device to the system.

An audio source to be operated with the

voice recognition system has not been se-

lected.

Select an audio source to be operated with

the voice recognition system.

“Voice recognition settings” (page 7-23)

An error message is displayed when trying to

select a track and operate USB/iPod.

The track information is being processed for

registration by the system.

Song information will be loaded into the

system when a new audio device is registered

for the first time or when the song informa-

tion in the pre-registered device has been

changed. Please wait for the loading to

complete which may take a few minutes to up

to an hour.

Exceeding number of songs are stored in the

connected audio device than it can hold.

Decrease the number of songs stored in the

audio device.

No song is stored in the audio device. Store songs in the connected audio device.

Storing songs with information such as artist

name, album name, song name, playlist, etc.,

will make voice recognition song search

available.

The system does not correctly recognize a

Point of Interest (POI) name spoken.

There are some rare cases where a POI

search is unavailable by speaking the facility

name but the location can be found on the

map.

This is not a malfunction. Consider using an

alternate search method, like street address.

8-30

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The system does not correctly recognize a

Point of Interest (POI) name spoken.

Partial or alias name is spoken. For best results, speak the full name.

8. Troubleshooting guide

8-31

8. Troubleshooting guide

MEMO

8-32

Number

2D map...................................................................... 6-4

About route guidance................................. 6-28

Adjusting settings........................................... 2-18

Android Auto...................................................... 5-23

Apple CarPlay..................................................... 5-20

Audio main buttons....................... 3-10, 3-12

Audio operation precautions ................... 3-2

Audio operations............................................. 3-14

AUX (auxiliary) input jack........................... 2-12

Auxiliary (AUX) devices................................ 3-35

Birdview™ (3D) map......................................... 6-5

Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System....................................................... 4-2

Bluetooth® setting......................................... 4-13

Bluetooth® streaming audio...... 3-9, 3-32

Building graphics............................................... 6-6

Canceling Route .............................................. 6-37

CD/USB memory device care

and cleaning....................................................... 3-38

Changing map..................................................... 6-8

Changing order of destination

and waypoints................................................... 6-39

Changing scale of map................................. 6-7

Clock settings.................................................... 2-25

Command list ....................................................... 7-6

Compact Disc (CD) player............. 3-4, 3-21

Compatibility...................................................... 5-23

Compressed Audio

Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) .................................... 3-7

Confirming route............................................. 6-37

Connecting Bluetooth®

audio device........................................................ 2-26

Connecting Bluetooth® device............. 2-26

Connecting Bluetooth®

Hands-free Phone............................................. 4-4

Connecting cellular phone...................... 2-26

Connecting to Interactive

Voice Menu.......................................................... 5-12

Control buttons and touch

screen display....................................................... 2-2

Control panel............................................. 2-2, 2-4

Current location map screen................ 6-13

Current vehicle location............................ 6-61

Customer assistance...................................... 8-2

Deleting stored item..................................... 6-55

Destination setting menu........................ 6-14

Display Commander..................................... 2-11

Display settings................................................ 2-24

Displaying current vehicle location..... 6-3

Displaying urgent

traffic information.......................................... 6-48

During a call........................................................... 4-5

Editing route....................................................... 6-37

Editing stored information...................... 6-53

Emergency support...................................... 5-15

Finding address................................................ 6-17

Finding nearby place ................................... 6-18

Finding points of interest......................... 6-19

Functions disabled while driving........ 2-22

Giving voice commands............................... 7-2

Hands-free text

messaging assistant....................................... 4-6

Index

9-1

Index

How to handle the Map SD card......... 6-67

How to handle the SD card..................... 6-75

How to see voice command screen.... 7-3

Information feeds........................................... 5-14

Information menu............................................. 5-2

iPod player............................................................ 3-28

Laser product ....................................................... 1-5

Launch Bar........................................................... 2-14

Liquid crystal display....................................... 2-6

Making a call.......................................................... 4-4

Map data................................................................ 6-67

Map Menu screen........................................... 6-13

Map operation...................................................... 6-3

Map types................................................................ 6-3

Map view settings.............................................. 6-9

Moving map........................................................... 6-6

Navigation settings....................................... 6-58

NissanConnect

Services.......................... 5-7

NissanConnect

Services settings.............................................. 5-17

Notes on SiriusXM

Traffic information......................................... 5-19

Number input screen................................... 2-19

One Shot Call........................................................ 7-3

Operating with voice.................................... 5-25

Options before starting the

route guidance................................................. 6-26

Phone.......................................................................... 4-4

Phone selection................................................... 4-4

Phone settings.................................................. 4-10

Phonebook........................................................... 4-12

Quick Dial.............................................................. 4-12

Radio............................................................. 3-2, 3-15

Recalculating route....................................... 6-40

Receiving a call.................................................... 4-5

Route calculation............................................ 6-65

Route guidance................................. 6-28, 6-66

Route guidance settings........................... 6-41

Route menu......................................................... 6-34

Safety information................................. 1-3, 6-3

Scrolled location map screen................ 6-14

Searching for detour route using

traffic information.......................................... 6-40

Searching from address book.............. 6-21

Searching from

previous destinations.................................. 6-22

Setting at information on map............ 6-12

Setting by phone number........................ 6-23

Setting city center.......................................... 6-23

Setting detour route .................................... 6-41

Setting freeway entrance/exit............. 6-24

Setting from stored routes..................... 6-24

Setting home as destination................. 6-21

Setting intersection....................................... 6-22

Setting new destination............................ 6-37

Setting point on map.................................. 6-25

Setting with

NissanConnect

Services....................... 6-25

Settings menu................................................... 2-23

Siri .............................................................................. 5-21

9-2

SiriusXM Travel Link...................................... 5-18

Specifying region ............................................ 6-17

Split screen............................................................. 6-8

Starting system................................................ 2-14

Start-up screen................................................ 2-14

Steering wheel controls

for audio.................................................. 3-13, 3-14

Storing a location/route........................... 6-50

Storing avoid area.......................................... 6-51

Storing home location................................ 6-50

Storing location................................................ 6-50

Storing route...................................................... 6-51

Subscription to

NissanConnect

Services.......................... 5-7

System settings................................................ 2-23

Text message settings............................... 4-10

Touch panel........................................................ 2-16

Trademarks............................................................ 1-4

Traffic information on map .................... 6-48

Traffic information setting...................... 6-49

Transferring information to/from

address book..................................................... 6-56

Turn list................................................................... 6-33

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

connection port(s).............................. 2-12, 3-5

USB memory device player..................... 3-24

Viewing SiriusXM Travel Link................. 5-18

Viewing traffic events from list............ 6-47

Viewing traffic information..................... 6-47

Voice Prompt Interrupt................................. 7-3

Voice recognition............................................... 7-2

Voice recognition settings....................... 7-23

Volume settings............................................... 2-24

Index

9-3

Index

MEMO

9-4

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2018 NISSANCONNECT®NCGNJ-N

NCGNJ-N

Printing : June 2018

Publication No.:

Printed in the U.S.A.

N18E NCGNJU1

2018 NISSANCONNECT®

OWNER’S MANUAL

MAXIMA MURANO

ALTIMA

2018 NissanConnect Owner's Manual | Nissan USA (Altima, Maxima, And Murano) Connect Navigation

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation